Omron SX Inverter Manual SXManual
User Manual: SXManual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 314
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Cat. No. I127E-EN-03
SX-V
High power Variable Frequency Inverters
Model: SX-V
400 V Class Three-Phase Input 0.75 kW to 800 kW
690 V Class Three-Phase Input 90 kW to 1000 kW
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
O M RO N S X - V
I N S T RU C T I O N M A N UA L - E N G L I S H
Software version 4.3X and higher
Document number: I 1 2 7 E - E N - 0 3
Document name : Omron SX inverter manual
Date of release: 03-2012
© OMRON, 2012
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any
means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly
striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual.
Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from
the use of the information contained in this publication.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials
and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of
sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS
FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER
ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED
THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED
ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price
of the product on which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR,
OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED,
INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION,
ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or
use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification
documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This
information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of
the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must
be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the
products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products:
o Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual.
o Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment,
and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.
o Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS
RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A
WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE
OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE
INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
ii
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable
product, or any consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on
improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change model numbers when
published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes
are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without
any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your
OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased
products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of
OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application
requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be
accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
iii
Safety Instructions
Precautions severity
Danger. High immediate risk of serious injury or death. In addition there may be severe damage
to the inverter, installation or other property.
Warning. Potential risk for malfunction or severe damage to the inverter or installation. Possibility
of serious injury or death to the user.
Caution. Follow this advice for good practice. Not following can lead to malfunctioning or possibility of injury to the user.
Earth and grounding. Potential risk of electric shock or damage to inverter or installation.
Risk if manipulated by unqualified personnel
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
Instruction manual
Read throuhfully this instruction manual before using the Variable Speed Drive, VSD
Mains voltage selection
The variable speed drive may be ordered for use with the mains voltage range listed below.
SX-V-4: 230-480 V
SX-V-6: 500-690 V
IT Mains supply
The variable speed drives can be modified for an IT mains supply, (non-earthed neutral), check
manual and contract your supplier in case of doubt.
EMC Regulations
In order to comply with the EMC Directive, it is absolutely necessary to follow the installation
instructions.
Transport
To avoid damage, keep the variable speed drive in its original packaging during transport. This
packaging is specially designed to absorb shocks during transport.
Handling the inverter
Installation, commissioning, dismounting, taking measurements, etc, of or on the variable speed
drive may only be carried out by personnel technically qualified for the task. The installation must
be carried out in accordance with local standards.
iv
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
Safety Instructions
Condensation
If the variable speed drive is moved from a cold (storage) room to a room where it will be
installed, condensation can occur. This can result in sensitive components becoming damp. Do
not connect the mains voltage until all visible dampness has evaporated.
Grounding the inverter
Be sure to ground the unit. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or
fire.
Power factor capacitors for improving cos
Remove all capacitors from the motor and the motor outlet.
Incorrect connection
The variable speed drive is not protected against incorrect connection of the mains voltage, and
in particular against connection of the mains voltage to the motor outlets U, V and W. The variable speed drive can be damaged in this way.
Stop motion mechanical device to ensure safety
The inverter controls the motor electrically, but has no means to stop it mechanically under some
types of failures... In applications where mechanical stop is required to a degree of safety, a
safety assurance study should be carried out to determine the need of additional mechanical
braking devices.
Braking resistor and regenerative braking units
In case the application needs it, be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor/regenerative
braking unit. In case of a braking resistor, install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of
the resistor. Not doing so might result in a burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor/
regenerative braking unit. Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when
unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit.
Electric protection of installation
Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or fuses that
matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side. Not doing so might result in damage to
property due to the short circuit of the load.
Wiring works and servicing the inverter
Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel. Not doing so may result in a serious
injury due to an electric shock. Do not dismantle, repair or modify this product if you’re not authorised and qualified for it. Doing so may result in an injury.
DC-link residual voltage
After switching off the mains supply, dangerous voltage can still be present in the VSD. When
opening the VSD for installing and/or commissioning activities wait at least 10 minutes. In case
of malfunction a qualified technician should check the DC-link or wait for one hour before dismantling the VSD for repair.
Opening the variable speed drive cover
Only qualified technician can open the inverter. Always take adequate precautions before opening the inverter. Although the connections for the control signals and the switches are isolated
from the main voltage, do not touch the control board when the variable speed drive is switched
on.
Do not manipulate inverter under power
Do not change wiring , put on or take off optional devices or replace cooling fans while the input
power is being supplied. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off. Not doing so
may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. The main power supply is not necessarily
shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated.
v
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
Safety Instructions
Precautions to be taken with a connected motor
If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the driven machine, the mains voltage
must always be disconnected from the variable speed drive first. Wait at least 5 minutes before
starting work.
Short-circuits
The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which, if short-circuited, might cause damage to itself
or other property. Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no
metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring.
Earth leakage current
This variable speed drive has an earth leakage current which does exceed 3.5 mA AC. Therefore the minimum size of the protective earth conductor must comply with the local safety regulations for high leakage current equipment which means that according the standard IEC61800-51 the protective earth connection must be assured by one of following conditions:
1. PE conductor cross-sectional are shall for cable size 16mm2 be equal to the used phase
conductors, for cable size above 16mm2 but smaller or equal to 35mm2 the PE conductor
cross-sectional area shall be at least 16mm2. For cables > 35mm2 the PE conductor crosssectional area should be at least 50% of the used phase conductor.
2. When the PE conductor in the used cable type is not in accordance with the above mentioned
cross-sectional area requirements, a separate PE conductor should be used to establish this.
Residual current device (RCD) compatibility
This product cause a DC current in the protective conductor. Where a residual current device
(RCD) is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only a Type B RCD is allowed on
the supply side of this product. Use RCD of 300 mA minimum.
Voltage tests (Megger)
Do not carry out voltage tests (Megger) on the motor, before all the motor cables have been disconnected from the variable speed drive.
Precautions during Autoreset
When the automatic reset is active, the motor may restart automatically provided that the cause
of the trip has been removed. If necessary take the appropriate precautions.
Heat warning
Be aware of specific parts on the VSD having high temperature. Do not touch the Inverter fins, braking resistors and the motor, which may become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the
power shut-off. Doing so may result in a burn.
Do not Operate the inverter with wet hands
Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in a serious
injury due to an electric shock.
Warning
The Brake Resistor must be connected between terminals DC+ and R.
Warning
In order to work safely, the mains earth must be connected to PE and the motor earth to
vi
.
Table of contents
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
Precautions severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
iv
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
Delivery and unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the instruction manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1 Product standard for EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Dismantling and scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-1 Abbreviations and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7
8
9
9
10
11
11
11
SECTION 2
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2-1 Lifting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Stand-alone units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Mounting schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Cabinet mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Recommended free space in front of cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3 Mounting schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
16
16
17
21
21
21
22
SECTION 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
3-1 Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Mains cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 Motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Connect motor and mains cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Connection of mains and motor cables on IP20 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Stripping lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 Dimension of cables and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2 Tightening torque for mains and motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Thermal protection on the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Motors in parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
25
25
27
31
33
34
34
34
34
35
35
1
Table of contents
SECTION 4
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
4-1 Connect the mains and motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Mains cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Motor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Using the function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Connect control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 Switch on the mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-3 Set the Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-4 Run the VSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-1 Switch on the mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-2 Select manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-3 Set the Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-4 Enter a Reference Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-5 Run the VSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
37
37
38
38
38
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
SECTION 5
Control Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
5-1 Control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Terminal connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Inputs configuration
with the switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
5-4 Connection example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Connecting the Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-1 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-2 Types of control signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-3 Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-4 Single-ended or double-ended connection? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-6 Twisted cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Connecting options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
45
45
47
48
48
48
49
49
SECTION 6
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
6-1 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-3 Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-4 Blowers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
51
51
51
52
2
41
42
Table of contents
SECTION 7
Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
7-1 Parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1 One motor and one parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-2 One motor and two parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-3 Two motors and two parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-4 Autoreset at trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-5 Reference priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-6 Preset references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Remote control functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Performing an Identification Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Using the Control Panel Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1 Load Monitor [410] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Pump sequencer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-2 Fixed MASTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-3 Alternating MASTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-4 Feedback 'Status' input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-5 Fail safe operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-6 PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-7 Wiring Alternating Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-8 Checklist And Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-9 Functional Examples of Start/Stop Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
55
55
55
55
56
56
57
60
61
62
62
64
64
66
66
67
68
68
69
70
71
SECTION 8
EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
8-1 EMC standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
SECTION 9
Operation via the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
9-1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2 The control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-1 The display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-2 Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-3 LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-4 Control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-6 Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3 The menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1 The main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4 Programming during operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5 Editing values in a menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6 Copy current parameter to all sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7 Programming example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
75
75
77
77
77
78
80
81
82
82
83
83
83
SECTION 10
Serial communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
Modbus RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start and stop commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-1 Process value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6 Description of the EInt formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
86
86
87
87
87
88
3
Table of contents
SECTION 11
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
11-1 Preferred View [100] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1-1 1st Line [110] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1-2 2nd Line [120] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2 Main Setup [200] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-1 Operation [210] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-2 Remote Signal Level/Edge [21A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-3 Mains supply voltage [21B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-4 Motor Data [220] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-5 Motor Protection [230] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-6 Parameter Set Handling [240] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions [250] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-8 Serial Communication [260] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3 Process and Application Parameters [300] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-1 Set/View Reference Value [310] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-2 Process Settings [320] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-3 Start/Stop settings [330] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-4 Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-5 Speed [340] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-6 Torques [350] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-7 Preset References [360] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-8 PID Process Control [380] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-1 Load Monitor [410] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-2 Process Protection [420] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5 I/Os and Virtual Connections [500] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-1 Analogue Inputs [510] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-2 Digital Inputs [520] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-3 Analogue Outputs [530] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-4 Digital Outputs [540] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-5 Relays [550] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-6 Virtual Connections [560] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6 Logical Functions and Timers [600] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-1 Comparators [610] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-2 Logic Output Y [620] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-3 Logic Output Z [630] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-4 Timer1 [640] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-5 Timer2 [650] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7 View Operation/Status [700] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7-1 Operation [710] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7-2 Status [720] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7-3 Stored values [730] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-8 View Trip Log [800] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-8-1 Trip Message log [810] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-8-2 Trip Messages [820] - [890] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-8-3 Reset Trip Log [8A0] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-9 System Data [900] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-9-1 VSD Data [920] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
92
92
92
93
98
99
99
107
112
115
127
132
132
133
140
146
151
156
159
161
179
179
186
189
189
200
203
209
212
215
217
217
232
235
237
240
243
243
246
251
254
254
255
256
257
257
4
Table of contents
SECTION 12
Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
12-1 Trips, warnings and limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2 Trip conditions, causes and remedial action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2-1 Technically qualified personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2-2 Opening the variable speed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2-3 Precautions to take with a connected motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2-4 Autoreset Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
261
261
261
261
262
264
SECTION 13
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
13-1 Options for the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-2 CX-Drive software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-3 Brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-4 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-5 Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-6 PTC/PT100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-7 Serial communication and fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-8 Standby supply board option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-9 Safe Stop option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-10Output coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-11Liquid cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
265
266
268
268
268
268
268
271
273
273
SECTION 14
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
Electrical specifications related to model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation at higher temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation at higher switching frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-7-1 According IEC ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-7-2 Fuses and cable dimensions according NEMA ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-8 Control signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
276
278
278
279
279
280
280
282
284
SECTION 15
Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
285
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
301
5
Table of contents
6
SECTION 1
Introduction
Omron SX-V is used most commonly to control and protect pump and fan
applications that put high demands on flow control, process uptime and low
maintenance costs. It can also be used for e.g. compressors and blowers. The
used motor control method is V/Hz-control. Several options are available,
listed in chapter 13, that enable you to customize the variable speed drive for
your specific needs.
Users
This instruction manual is intended for:
•
Installation engineers
•
Maintenance engineers
•
Operators
•
Service engineers
Motors
The variable speed drive is suitable for use with standard 3-phase asynchronous motors. Under certain conditions it is possible to use other types of
motors. Contact your supplier for details.
1-1
Delivery and unpacking
Check for any visible signs of damage. Inform your supplier immediately of
any damage found. Do not install the variable speed drive if damage is found.
The variable speed drives are delivered with a template for positioning the fixing holes on a flat surface. Check that all items are present and that the type
number is correct.
1-2
Using the instruction manual
Within this instruction manual the abbreviation “VSD” is used to indicate the
complete variable speed drive as a single unit.
Check that the software version number on the first page of this manual
matches the software version in the variable speed drive.
With help of the index and the contents it is easy to track individual functions
and to find out how to use and set them.
The Quick Setup Card can be put in a cabinet door, so that it is always easy to
access in case of an emergency.
7
Ordering codes
1-3
Section 1-3
Ordering codes
Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 give examples of the ordering code numbering used on SX
variable speed drives. With this code number the exact type of the drive can
be determined. This identification will be required for type specific information
when mounting and installing. The code number is located on the product
label, on the front of the unit.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SX-
D
6
160- E
V
-OPTIONS
Fig. 1 Type code number
Position
n.chars
Configuration
1
3
Inverter family name
“SX-”
“A”=IP20
“D”=IP54
“4”=400V
“6”=690V
“0P7-”=0.75kW
...
“1K0-”=1000kW
2
1
Protection class
3
1
Voltage Class
4
4
Power in kW
(normal duty rating)
5
1
Market
6
6
7
0 to 13
Control type
All options with single letter (see table
below)
“E”=Europe
“E1”=Europe IP54 cabinet with front
door fan
“V”=V/Hz
“-”+letters A to Z
Fig. 2 Option letters
Options
Control panel
Built-in EMC filter
Built-in brake chopper
Standby power supply
Safe stop
Coated boards
Option board
position 1
Option board
position 2
8
Letter (“?” means no character)
“?” = Standard control panel (Std.PPU)
“A”= Blank control panel (Blank PPU)
“?” = Standard EMC inside (Category C3)
“B” = IT-Net (filter disconnected from ground)
“?” = No brake chopper or DC-connection included
“C” = Brake chopper & DC-connection included
“D” = Only DC-connection included
“?” = Not included
“E” = Standby power supply included
“?” = Not included
“F” = Safe stop included
“?” = No coating
“G” = Coated boards
“?” = No option
“H” = Crane I/O
“I” = Encoder
“J” = PTC/PT100
“K” = Extended I/O“
“?” = No option
“I” = Encoder
“J” = PTC/PT100
“K” = Extended I/O“
Standards
Section 1-4
Options
Option board
position 3
Option board
Fieldbus
position 4
Liquid Cooling
Standard
Marine
Cabinet input options
Cabinet output options
Additional options
1-4
Letter (“?” means no character)
“?” = No option
“I” = Encoder
“J” = PTC/PT100
“K” = Extended I/O“
“?” = No option
“L” = DeviceNet
“M” = Profibus-DP
“M1” = Profinet
“N” = RS232/485
“O” = EtherNet Modbus TCP
“O1” = EtherCAT
“?” = No Liquid Cooling
“P” = Liquid Cooling
“?” = IEC
“Q” = UL
“?” = No marine option
“R” = Marine option included
“?” = No cabinet input options
“S” = Main switch included
“T” = Main contactor included
“U” = Main switch + contactor included
“?” = No cabinet output options included
“V” = dU/dt filter included
“W” = dU/dt filter + Overshoot clamp included
“X” = Sinus filter included
“X1” = All-pole sinus filter included
“Z1”= Common mode output filter
“Z2”= Cable Gland kit
“Z3”= Motor PTC connection
Options only available for model between 0.37 and 37KW
Standards
The variable speed drives described in this instruction manual comply with the
standards listed in Table 2. For the declarations of conformity contact your
supplier for more information.
1-4-1
Product standard for EMC
Product standard EN(IEC)61800-3, defines the:
First Environment (Extended EMC) as environment that includes domestic
premises. It also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Category C2: Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage<1.000 V, which is
neither a plug in device nor a movable device and, when used in the first environment, is intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional.
Second environment (Standard EMC) includes all other establishments.
Category C3: PDS of rated voltage <1.000 V, intended for use in the second
environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Category C4: PDS or rated voltage equal or above 1.000 V, or rated current
equal to or above 400 A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment.
The variable speed drive complies with the product standard
EN(IEC) 61800-3:2004 (Any kind of metal screened cable may be used). The
standard variable speed drive is designed to meet the requirements according
to category C3.
9
Dismantling and scrapping
Section 1-5
By using the optional “Extended EMC” filter the VSD fulfils requirements
according to category C2,
!Warning In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which
case it may be necessary to take adequate additional measures.
!Warning The standard VSD, complying with category C3, is not intended to be used on
a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises; radio
interference is expected if used in such a network. Contact your supplier if you
need additional measures.
Table 1
Standards
Market
Standard
Description
EMC Directive
Low Voltage Directive
European
EN(IEC)61800-3:2004
EN(IEC)61800-5-1 Ed. 2.0
All
IEC 60721-3-3
UL508C
USA
UL and UL
Russian
1-5
90 A only
UL 840
GOST R
2004/108/EEC
2006/95/EC
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods.
EMC Directive:
Declaration of Conformity and
CE marking
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-1.
Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy.
Low Voltage Directive: Declaration of Conformity and
CE marking
Classification of environmental conditions. Air quality chemical vapours, unit
in operation. Chemical gases 3C1, Solid particles 3S2.
Optional with coated boards
Unit in operation. Chemical gases Class 3C2, Solid particles 3S2.
Contact your Omron representative
Contact your Omron representative
Contact your Omron representative
Dismantling and scrapping
The enclosures of the drives are made from recyclable material as aluminium,
iron and plastic. Each drive contains a number of components demanding
special treatment, for example electrolytic capacitors. The circuit boards contain small amounts of tin and lead. Any local or national regulations in force for
the disposal and recycling of these materials must be complied with.
10
Glossary
1-6
1-6-1
Section 1-6
Glossary
Abbreviations and symbols
In this manual the following abbreviations are used:
Table 2
Abbreviations
Abbreviation/symbol
DSP
VSD
PEBB
Digital signals processor
Variable speed drive
Power electronic building block
Control panel, the programming and presentation unit on
the VSD
Communication format
Communication format
Communication format
Communication format
CP
EInt
UInt
Int
Long
1-6-2
Description
The function cannot be changed in run mode
Definitions
In this manual the following definitions for current, torque and frequency are
used:
Table 3
Definitions
Name
IIN
INOM
IMOT
PNOM
PMOT
TNOM
TMOT
fOUT
fMOT
nMOT
ICL
Speed
Torque
Sync speed
Description
Nominal input current of VSD
Nominal output current of VSD
Nominal motor current
Nominal power of VSD
Motor power
Nominal torque of motor
Motor torque
Output frequency of VSD
Nominal frequency of motor
Nominal speed of motor
Maximum output current
Actual motor speed
Actual motor torque
Synchronous speed of the motor
Quantity
ARMS
ARMS
ARMS
kW
kW
Nm
Nm
Hz
Hz
rpm
ARMS
rpm
Nm
rpm
11
Glossary
12
Section 1-6
SECTION 2
Mounting
This chapter describes how to mount the VSD.
Before mounting it is recommended that the installation is planned out first.
2-1
•
Be sure that the VSD suits the mounting location.
•
The mounting site must support the weight of the VSD.
•
Will the VSD continuously withstand vibrations and/or shocks?
•
Consider using a vibration damper.
•
Check ambient conditions, ratings, required cooling air flow, compatibility
of the motor, etc.
•
Know how the VSD will be lifted and transported.
Lifting instructions
Note To prevent personal risks and any damage to the unit during lifting, it is
advised that the lifting methods described below are used.
Models 4090 to 4132 and 6090 to 6250
Load: 56 to 74 kg
Fig. 3 Lifting model 4090-4132 and 6090-6250
13
Lifting instructions
Section 2-1
Models 4160 to -4800 and 6315 to 61K0
Lifting eyes
Fig. 4 Remove the roof plate and use the lifting eyes to lift.
A
Fig. 5 Lifting VSD model 4160-4800 and 6315-61K0
14
Lifting instructions
Section 2-1
Single drives can be lift/transported safely using the eyebolts supplied and lifting cables/chains as in illustration above.
Depending on the cable/chain angle A following load are permitted:
Cable/Chain angle A
Permitted load
45º
60º
90º
4800 N
6400 N
13600 N
15
Stand-alone units
2-2
Section 2-2
Stand-alone units
The VSD must be mounted in a vertical position against a flat surface. Use the
template (delivered together with the VSD) to mark out the position of the fixing holes.
Fig. 6 Mounting models 4090-4800 and 6090-61K0
2-2-1
Cooling
Fig. 6 shows the minimum free space required around the VSD for the models
40P7-4800 and 6090-61K0 in order to guarantee adequate cooling. Because
the fans blow the air from the bottom to the top it is advisable not to position
an air inlet immediately above an air outlet.
The following minimum separation between two variable speed drives, or a
VSD and a non-dissipating wall must be maintained. Valid if free space on
opposite side.
Table 4
Mounting and cooling
SX-V (mm)
SX-V wall, wall-one side
(mm)
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
40P7-47P5
4011-4037
4045-4132
6090-6250
4160-4800
6315-61K0
cabinet
200
200
0
0
100
100
0
0
200
200
0
0
100
100
0
0
200
200
0
0
100
100
0
0
100
0
0
0
100
0
0
0
Note When a 4160-4800 or 6315-61K0 model is placed between two walls, a
minimum distance at each side of 200 mm must be maintained.
16
Stand-alone units
Mounting schemes
37
10
128.5
396
Ø 13 (2x)
416
2-2-2
Section 2-2
Ø 7 (4x)
202.6
Fig. 7 SX-V: Model 40P7 to 47P5 (B)
Glands
M20
Gland
M16
Gland
M25
Glands
M32
Fig. 8 SX-V: Model 40P7 to 47P5 (B) Cable interface for mains, motor and
communication.
Fig. 9 SX-V: Model 40P7 to 47P5 (B) with optional gland plate
17
Stand-alone units
Section 2-2
24,8
10
128,5
492
512
Ø 13 (2x)
292
178
,1
Ø 7 (4x)
Fig. 10 SX-V: Model 4011 to 4022 (C)
Gland
M25 (4011-4015)
M32 (4018-4022)
Glands
M20
Glands
M32 (4011-4015)
M40 (4018-4022)
Fig. 11 SX-V: Model 4011 to 4022 (C) Cable interface for mains, motor and
communication.
18
Stand-alone units
Section 2-2
(2x)
590
160
Ø
13
570
10
30
Ø 7 (4X)
220
Fig. 12 SX-V: Model 4030 to 4037 (D)
Glands
M20
Glands
M20
Glands
M50
Glands
M40
Fig. 13 SX-V: Model 4030 to 4037 (D) Cable interface for mains, motor and
communication.
Note Glands for Models 40P7 to 4037 are available as option kit
19
Stand-alone units
Section 2-2
Cable glands M20
Cable flexible leadthrough
Ø17-42 / M50
Cable flexible leadthrough
Ø11-32 / M40
284.5
275
920
950
925
Ø16(3x)
30
10
120
Ø9(6x)
240
22.5
314
Fig. 14 SX-V (400V): Models 4045 to 4090 (E) including cable interface for
mains, motor and communication
Cable glands M20
Cable flexible leadthrough
Ø23-55 / M63
22.50
300
344,5
335
600V 1065
600V 1090
600V 1060
400V 925
400V 950
400V 920
30
10
150
Ø9(x6)
Cable flexible leadthrough
Ø17-42 / M50
314
Fig. 15 SX-V (400V): Model 4110 to 4132 (F)
SX-V (690V): Model 6090 to 6160 (F69) including cable interface for
mains, motor and communication
20
Cabinet mounting
2-3
2-3-1
Section 2-3
Cabinet mounting
Cooling
If the variable speed drive is installed in a cabinet, the rate of airflow supplied
by the cooling fans must be taken into consideration.
Table 5
Flow rates cooling fans
Frame
SX-V Model
Flow rate [m3/hour]
B
40P7 - 47P5
75
C
4011 - 4015
120
c
4018 - 4022
170
D
4030 - 4037
175
E
4045 - 4090
510
F
4110 - 4132
F69
6090 - 6160
G
4160 - 4200
H
4220 - 4250
H69
6200 - 6355
I
4315 - 4400
I69
6450 - 6500
J
4450 - 4500
J69
6600 - 6630
K
4630 - 4800
K69
6710 - 61K0
800
1020
1600
2400
3200
4800
Note For the models 4450-4500 and 6800-61K0 the mentioned amount of air flow
should be divided equally over the two cabinets.
2-3-2
Recommended free space in front of cabinet
All cabinet mounted AC drives are designed in modules, so called PEBBs.
These PEBBs can be folded out to be replaced. To be able to remove a PEBB
in the future, we recommend 1.30 meter free in front of the cabinet, see next
figure for details.
L ATTI R
L ATTI R
L ATTI R
L ATTI R
L ATTI R
L ATTI R
1300
Fig. 16 Recommended free space in front of the cabinet mounted AC drive
21
Cabinet mounting
Mounting schemes
150
2-3-3
Section 2-3
R ITTAL
2000
R ITTAL
100
2250
R ITTAL
600
600
150
Fig. 17 SX-E1V (400V): Model 4160 to 4250 (G and H)
SX-E1V (690V): Model 6200 to 6355 (H69)
R ITTA L
R ITTA L
R ITTA L
2000
R ITTA L
100
2250
R ITTA L
900
600
Fig. 18 SX-E1V (400V): Model 4315 to 4400 (I)
SX-E1V (690V): Model 6450 to 6500 (I69)
22
Cabinet mounting
150
Section 2-3
R ITTAL
R ITTAL
R ITTAL
R ITTAL
2000
R ITTAL
100
2250
R ITTAL
600
1200
150
Fig. 19 SX-E1V (400V): Model 4450 to 4500 (J)
SX-E1V (690V): Model 6600 to 6630 (J69)
R ITTA L
R ITTA L
R ITTA L
R ITTA L
R ITTA L
R ITTA L
R ITTA L
R ITTA L
2000
R ITTA L
100
2250
R ITTA L
1800
600
Fig. 20 SX-E1V (400V): Model 4630 to 4800 (K)
SX-E1V (690V): Model 6710 to 61K0 (K69)
23
Cabinet mounting
24
Section 2-3
SECTION 3
Installation
The description of installation in this chapter complies with the EMC standards and the Machine Directive.
Select cable type and screening according to the EMC requirements valid for
the environment where the VSD is installed.
3-1
Before installation
Read the following checklist and think through your application before installation.
•
External or internal control.
•
Long motor cables (>100m), refer to section Long motor cables.
•
Motors in parallel, refer to menu [213].
•
Functions.
•
Suitable VSD size in proportion to the motor/application.
•
Mount separately supplied option boards according to the instructions in
the appropriate option manual.
If the VSD is temporarily stored before being connected, please check the
technical data for environmental conditions. If the VSD is moved from a cold
storage room to the room where it is to be installed, condensation can form on
it. Allow the VSD to become fully acclimatised and wait until any visible condensation has evaporated before connecting the mains voltage.
3-2
3-2-1
Cable connections
Mains cables
Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local regulations. The
cable must be able to carry the VSD load current.
Recommendations for selecting mains cables
•
To fulfil EMC purposes it is not necessary to use screened mains cables.
•
Use heat-resistant cables, +60C or higher.
•
Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with local regulations and
the nominal current of the motor. See table 49, page 280.
•
PE conductor cross-sectional are shall for cable size 16mm2 be equal to
the used phase conductors, for cable size above 16mm2 but smaller or
equal to 35mm2 the PE conductor cross-sectional area shall be at least
16mm2. For cables > 35mm2 the PE conductor cross-sectional area
should be at least 50% of the used phase conductor.
•
When the PE conductor in the used cable type is not in accordance with
the above mentioned cross-sectional area requirements, a separate PE
conductor should be used to establish this.
•
The litz ground connection see fig. 25, is only necessary if the mounting
plate is painted. All the variable speed drives have an unpainted back side
and are therefore suitable for mounting on an unpainted mounting plate.
25
Cable connections
Section 3-2
Connect the mains cables according to the next figures. The VSD has as
standard a built-in RFI mains filter that complies with category C3 which suits
the Second Environment standard.
L3
L2
DC-
DC+
W
V
U
L1
R
PE
Screen connection
of motor cables
Fig. 21 Mains and motor connection 40P7 to 47P5
L1
L2
L3 DCDC+ R
U
V
W
PE
Screen connection
of motor cables
Fig. 22 Mains and motor connection 4011 to 4022
L1 L2 L3 PE DC- DC+ R
U
V
W
Fig. 23 Mains and motor connection 4030 to 4037
Table 6
Mains and motor connection
L1,L2,L3 PE
Mains supply, 3 -phase Safety earth (protected earth)
Motor earth Motor output, 3-phase
U, V, W
(DC-),DC+,R
26
Brake resistor, DC-link connections (optional)
Cable connections
Section 3-2
Note The Brake and DC-link Terminals are only fitted if the Brake Chopper Option is
built-in.
!Warning The Brake Resistor must be connected between terminals DC+ and R.
!Warning In order to work safely, the mains earth must be connected to PE and the
motor earth to
.
3-2-2
Motor cables
To comply with the EMC emission standards the variable speed drive is provided with a RFI mains filter. The motor cables must also be screened and
connected on both sides. In this way a so-called “Faraday cage” is created
around the VSD, motor cables and motor. The RFI currents are now fed back
to their source (the IGBTs) so the system stays within the emission levels.
Recommendations for selecting motor cables
•
Use screened cables according to specification in table 7. Use symmetrical shielded cable; three phase conductors and a concentric or otherwise
symmetrically constructed PE conductor, and a shield.
•
PE conductor cross-sectional are shall for cable size 16mm2 be equal to
the used phase conductors, for cable size above 16mm2 but smaller or
equal to 35mm2 the PE conductor cross-sectional area shall be at least
16mm2. For cables > 35mm2 the PE conductor cross-sectional area
should be at least 50% of the used phase conductor.
•
When the PE conductor in the used cable type is not in accordance with
the above mentioned cross-sectional area requirements, a separate PE
conductor should be used to establish this.
•
When the conductivity of the cable PE conductor is <50% of the conductivity of the phase conductor, a separate PE conductor is required.
•
Use heat-resistant cables, +60C or higher.
•
Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with the nominal output
current of the motor. See table 49, page 280.
•
Keep the motor cable between VSD and motor as short as possible.
•
The screening must be connected with a large contact surface of preferable 360 and always at both ends, to the motor housing and the VSD housing. When painted mounting plates are used, do not be afraid to scrape
away the paint to obtain as large contact surface as possible at all mounting points for items such as saddles and the bare cable screening. Relying
just on the connection made by the screw thread is not sufficient.
Note It is important that the motor housing has the same earth potential as the
other parts of the machine.
•
The litz ground connection, see fig. 26, is only necessary if the mounting
plate is painted. All the variable speed drives have an unpainted back side
and are therefore suitable for mounting on an unpainted mounting plate.
Connect the motor cables according to U - U, V - V and W - W.
Note The terminals DC-, DC+ and R are options.
Switches between the motor and the VSD
If the motor cables are to be interrupted by maintenance switches, output
coils, etc., it is necessary that the screening is continued by using metal housing, metal mounting plates, etc. as shown in the Fig. 25.
27
Cable connections
Section 3-2
Fig. 26 shows an example when there is no metal mounting plate used (e.g. if
IP54 variable speed drives are used). It is important to keep the “circuit”
closed, by using metal housing and cable glands.
Screen connection
of signal cables
PE
Motor cable shield
connection
Fig. 24 Screen connection of cables.
Pay special attention to the following points:
28
•
If paint must be removed, steps must be taken to prevent subsequent corrosion. Repaint after making connections!
•
The fastening of the whole variable speed drive housing must be electrically connected with the mounting plate over an area which is as large as
possible. For this purpose the removal of paint is necessary. An alternative
method is to connect the variable speed drive housing to the mounting
plate with as short a length of litz wire as possible.
•
Try to avoid interruptions in the screening wherever possible.
•
If the variable speed drive is mounted in a standard cabinet, the internal
wiring must comply with the EMC standard. Fig. 25 shows an example of a
VSD built into a cabinet.
Cable connections
Section 3-2
VSD built into cabinet
RFI-Filter
(option)
Mains
VSD
Motor
Metal EMC cable glands
Output coil (option)
Litz
Screened cables
Unpainted mounting plate
Metal connector housing
Mains
(L1,L2,L3,PE)
Metal EMC
coupling nut
Motor
Brake resistor
(option)
Fig. 25 Variable speed drive in a cabinet on a mounting plate
Fig. 26 shows an example when there is no metal mounting plate used (e.g. if
IP54 variable speed drives are used). It is important to keep the “circuit”
closed, by using metal housing and cable glands.
VSD
RFI-Filter
Mains
Metal EMC cable glands
Screened cables
Metal housing
Brake
resistor
(option)
Output
coils
(option)
Metal connector housing
Metal cable gland
Motor
Mains
Fig. 26 Variable speed drive as stand alone
29
Cable connections
Section 3-2
Connect motor cables
1. Remove the cable interface plate from the VSD housing.
2. Put the cables through the glands.
3. Strip the cable according to Table 8.
4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective motor terminal.
5. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the fixing screws.
6. Tighten the EMC gland with good electrical contact to the motor and brake
chopper cable screens.
Placing of motor cables
Keep the motor cables as far away from other cables as possible, especially
from control signals. The minimum distance between motor cables and control cables is 300 mm.
Avoid placing the motor cables in parallel with other cables.
The power cables should cross other cables at an angle of 90.
Long motor cables
If the connection to the motor is longer than 100 m (40 m for models 003-018),
it is possible that capacitive current peaks will cause tripping at overcurrent.
Using output coils can prevent this. Contact the supplier for appropriate coils.
Switching in motor cables
Switching in the motor connections is not advisable. In the event that it cannot
be avoided (e.g. emergency or maintenance switches) only switch if the current is zero. If this is not done, the VSD can trip as a result of current peaks.
30
Connect motor and mains cables
3-3
Section 3-3
Connect motor and mains cables
SX-D4045-EV to SX-D4132-EV and SX-D6090-EVto SXD6160-EV
To simplify the connection of thick motor and mains cables to the VSD model
SX-D4045-EV to SX-D4132-EV and SX-D6090-EV to SX-D6160-EV the cable
interface plate can be removed.
Clamps for screening
Cable interface
Motor cable
DC+, DC-, R (optional)
Mains cable
Fig. 27 Connecting motor and mains cables
1. Remove the cable interface plate from the VSD housing.
2. Put the cables through the glands.
3. Strip the cable according to Table 8.
4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective mains/motor terminal.
5. Fix the clamps on appropriate place and tighten the cable in the clamp with
good electrical contact to the cable screen.
6. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the fixing screws.
31
Connect motor and mains cables
Section 3-3
SX-D4160-EV to SX-D4800-EV and SX-D6200-EVto SXD61K0-EV
Motor connection
U
V
W
U
V
W
1 L1
3 L2
5 L3
L1
1 1 COM
1 1 COM
sp eisung
Power supply
L2
NO
NO
14
14
NC
NC
12
12
COIL
COIL
A1
A
2 5 A
I
2 3
2 0
-ÜÜÜÜÜ-
0
3RV1021-4DA15
T1
A2
A
2 T1
4 T2
Mains connection
L1
L2
L3
6 T3
Q1 F1 K1
L3
X3
Ground / earth
connection bus bar
Fig. 28 Connecting motor and mains cables
VSD models SX-D4160-EV to SX-D4800-EV and SX-D6200-EV to SXD61K0-EV are supplied with power clamps for mains and motors. For connection of the PE and earth there is a bus bar.
For all type of wires to be connected the stripping length should be 32 mm.
32
Connect motor and mains cables
3-3-1
Section 3-3
Connection of mains and motor cables on IP20 modules
The IP20 modules are delivered complete with factory mounted cable for
mains and motor. The length of the cables are app. 1100mm. The cables are
marked as L1, L2, L3 for mains connection and U, V, W for motor connection.
PEBB 1
(Master)
PEBB 2
Mains cables
L1, L2, L3
Motor cables
U, V, W
Fig. 29 IP20 module size G with quantity 2x3 main cables and quantity 2x3
motor cables.
PEBB 1
(Master)
Mains cables
L1, L2, L3
PEBB 2
PEBB 3
Motor cables
U, V, W
Fig. 30 IP20 module size H/H69 with quantity 3x3 main cables and quantity
3x3 motor cables.
33
Cable specifications
Section 3-4
3-4
Cable specifications
Table 7
Cable specifications
Cable
Mains
Power cable suitable for fixed installation for the voltage used.
Symmetrical three conductor cable with concentric protection (PE) wire or a four conductor cable with compact low-impedance concentric shield for the voltage used.
Control cable with low-impedance shield, screened.
Motor
Control
3-5
Cable specification
Stripping lengths
Fig. 31 indicates the recommended stripping lengths for motor and mains
cables.
Table 8
Stripping lengths for mains and motor cables
Mains cable
Motor cable
Model
SX-D40P7-EV to SX-D47P5-EV
SX-D4011-EV to SX-D4022-EV
SX-D4030-EV to SX-D4037-EV
SX-D4045-EV to SX-D4090-EV
SX-D4110-EV to SX-D4132-EV
SX-D6090-EV to SX-D6160-EV
a (mm)
b (mm)
a (mm)
b (mm)
c (mm)
90
150
110
160
10
14
17
16
90
150
110
160
10
14
17
16
20
20
34
41
170
24
170
24
46
Mains
Motor
(06-F45-cables only)
Fig. 31 Stripping lengths for cables
3-5-1
Dimension of cables and fuses
Please refer to the chapter Technical data, section 14-7, page 280.
3-5-2
Table 9
Tightening torque for mains and motor cables
Model SX-D40P7-EV to SX-D4022-EV
Tightening torque, Nm
34
Brake chopper
Mains/motor
1.2 - 1.4
1.2 - 1.4
Thermal protection on the motor
Section 3-6
Table 10 Model SX-D4030-EV
Brake chopper
Mains/motor
2.8
2.8
Tightening torque, Nm
Table 11 Model SX-D4037-EV
Brake chopper
Mains/motor
5.0
5.0
Brake chopper
Mains/motor
95
16-95
14
95
16-95
14
Brake chopper
Mains/motor
95
16-95
14
150
Tightening torque, Nm
Table 12 Model SX-D4045-EV to SX-D4055-EV
2
Block, mm
Cable diameter, mm2
Tightening torque, Nm
Table 13 Model SX-D4075-EV to SX-D4090-EV
Block, mm2
Cable diameter, mm2
Tightening torque, Nm
35-95
14
120-150
24
Table 14 Model SX-D4110-EV to SX-D4132-EV and SX-D6090-EV to SX-D6160-EV
Brake chopper
2
Block, mm
Cable diameter, mm2
Tightening torque, Nm
3-6
Mains/motor
150
35-95
14
240
120-150
24
35-70
14
95-240
24
Thermal protection on the motor
Standard motors are normally fitted with an internal fan. The cooling capacity
of this built-in fan is dependent on the frequency of the motor. At low frequency, the cooling capacity will be insufficient for nominal loads. Please contact the motor supplier for the cooling characteristics of the motor at lower
frequency.
!Warning Depending on the cooling characteristics of the motor, the application, the
speed and the load, it may be necessary to use forced cooling on the motor.
Motor thermistors offer better thermal protection for the motor. Depending on
the type of motor thermistor fitted, the optional PTC input may be used. The
motor thermistor gives a thermal protection independent of the speed of the
motor, thus of the speed of the motor fan. See the functions, Motor I2t type
[231] and Motor I2t current [232].
3-7
Motors in parallel
It is possible to have motors in parallel as long as the total current does not
exceed the nominal value of the VSD. The following has to be taken into
account when setting the motor data:
Menu [221]
Motor Voltage:
Menu [222]
Motor Frequency:
Menu [223]
Motor Power:
The motors in parallel must have the same motor voltage.
The motors in parallel must have the same motor frequency.
Add the motor power values for the motors in parallel.
35
Motors in parallel
Section 3-7
Menu [224]
Motor Current:
Menu [225]
Motor Speed:
Menu [227]
Motor Cos PHI:
36
Add the current for the motors in parallel.
Set the average speed for the motors in parallel.
Set the average Cos PHI value for the motors in parallel.
SECTION 4
Getting Started
This chapter is a step by step guide that will show you the quickest way to get
the motor shaft turning. We will show you two examples, remote control and
local control.
We assume that the VSD is mounted on a wall or in a cabinet as in the chapter SECTION 2 page 13.
First there is general information of how to connect mains, motor and control
cables. The next section describes how to use the function keys on the control
panel. The subsequent examples covering remote control and local control
describe how to program/set the motor data and run the VSD and motor.
4-1
Connect the mains and motor cables
Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local regulations. The
cable must be able to carry the VSD load current.
4-1-1
Mains cables
1. Connect the mains cables as in Fig. 32. The VSD has, as standard, a builtin RFI mains filter that complies with category C3 which suits the Second
Environment standard.
4-1-2
Motor cables
2. Connect the motor cables as in Fig. 32. To comply with the EMC Directive
you have to use screened cables and the motor cable screen has to be
connected on both sides: to the housing of the motor and the housing of
the VSD.
VSD
RFI-Filter
Mains
Metal EMC cable glands
Screened cables
Metal housing
Brake
resistor
(option)
Output
coils
(option)
Metal connector housing
Metal EMC cable gland
Motor
Mains
Fig. 32 Connection of mains and motor cables
37
Using the function keys
Section 4-2
Table 15 Mains and motor connection
L1,L2,L3
PE
Mains supply, 3 -phase Safety earth
Motor earth Motor output, 3-phase
U, V, W
!Warning In order to work safely the mains earth must be connected to PE and the motor earth
to
4-2
.
Using the function keys
100
200
210
300
220
221
Fig. 33 Example of menu navigation when entering motor voltage
step to lower menu level or confirm changed setting
step to higher menu level or ignore changed setting
step to next menu on the same level
step to previous menu on the same level
increase value or change selection
decrease value or change selection
4-3
Remote control
In this example external signals are used to control the VSD/motor.
A standard 4-pole motor for 400 V, an external start button and a reference
value will also be used.
4-3-1
Connect control cables
Here you will make up the minimum wiring for starting. In this example the
motor/VSD will run with right rotation.
To comply with the EMC standard, use screened control cables with plaited
flexible wire up to 1.5 mm2 or solid wire up to 2.5 mm2.
3. Connect a reference value between terminals 7 (Common) and 2 (AnIn 1)
as in Fig. 34.
4. Connect an external start button between terminal 11 (+24 VDC) and 9
(DigIn2, RUNR) as in Fig. 34.
38
Remote control
Section 4-3
X1
1
+
12
13
2
Reference
4-20 mA
3
0V
4
5
6
14
15
16
17
18
7
8
Start
9
10
11
19
20
21
22
X2
41
31
32
33
42
43
X3
51
52
Fig. 34 Wiring
4-3-2
Switch on the mains
Once the mains is switched on, the internal fan in the VSD will run for 5 seconds.
4-3-3
Set the Motor Data
Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. The motor data is used in
the calculation of complete operational data in the VSD.
Change settings using the keys on the control panel. For further information
about the control panel and menu structure, see the chapter SECTION 9
page 75.
Menu [100], Preferred View is displayed when started.
1. Press
to display menu [200], Main Setup.
2. Press
and then
3. Press
to display menu [221] and set motor voltage.
to display menu [220], Motor Data.
4. Change the value using the
and
keys. Confirm with
.
5. Set motor frequency [222].
6. Set motor power [223].
7. Set motor current [224].
8. Set motor speed [225].
9. Set power factor (cos ) [227].
10. Select supply voltage level used [21B]
11. [229] Motor ID run: Choose Short, confirm with
mand .
and give start com-
The VSD will now measure some motor parameters. The motor makes some beeping sounds but the shaft does not rotate. When the ID run is finished after about
one minute ("Test Run OK!" is displayed), press
to continue.
12. Use AnIn1 as input for the reference value. The default range is 4-20 mA.
If you need a 0-10 V reference value, change switch (S1) on control board.
39
Local control
Section 4-4
13.
14.
15.
16.
4-3-4
Switch off power supply.
Connect digital and analogue inputs/outputs as in Fig. 34.
Ready!
Switch on power supply.
Run the VSD
Now the installation is finished, and you can press the external start button to
start the motor.
When the motor is running the main connections are OK.
4-4
Local control
Manual control via the control panel can be used to carry out a test run.
Use a 400 V motor and the control panel.
4-4-1
Switch on the mains
Once the mains is switched on, the VSD is started and the internal fan will run
for 5 seconds.
4-4-2
Select manual control
Menu [100], Preferred View is displayed when started.
1. Press
to display menu [200], Main Setup.
2. Press
to display menu [210], Operation.
3. Press
to display menu [211], Language.
4. Press
to display menu [214], Reference Control.
5. Select Keyboard using the key
6. Press
and press
to get to menu [215], Run/Stop Control.
7. Select Keyboard using the key
and press
8. Press
to get to previous menu level and then
Motor Data.
4-4-3
to confirm.
to confirm.
to display menu [220],
Set the Motor Data
Enter correct motor data for the connected motor.
9. Press
to display menu [221].
10. Change the value using the
11. Press
and
keys. Confirm with
.
to display menu [222].
12. Repeat step 9 and 10 until all motor data is entered.
13. Press
4-4-4
twice and then
to display menu [100], Preferred View.
Enter a Reference Value
Enter a reference value.
14. Press
until menu [300], Process is displayed.
15. Press
to display menu [310], Set/View reference value.
16. Use the
and
keys to enter, for example, 300 rpm. We select a low
value to check the rotation direction without damaging the application.
4-4-5
Run the VSD
Press the
key on the control panel to run the motor forward.
If the motor is running the main connections are OK.
40
SECTION 5
Control Connections
Control board
Fig. 35 shows the layout of the control board which is where the parts most
important to the user are located. Although the control board is galvanically
isolated from the mains, for safety reasons do not make changes while the
mains supply is on!
!Warning Always switch off the mains voltage and wait at least 7 minutes to allow the
DC capacitors to discharge before connecting the control signals or changing
position of any switches. If the option External supply is used, switch of the
mains to the option. This is done to prevent damage on the control board.
X5
X6
1
X4
X7
2
3
Option
C
Communication
X8
5-1
Control
Panel
Switches
I
S1 U
I
S2
U
S3
I
U
I
S4 U
Control
signals
12
13 14 15 16 17 18
21 22
19 20
R02
41 42 43
Relay outputs
DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DO1 DO2 DI8
AO1 AO2
X1 1
2
3
+10V AI1 AI2
4
5
AI3
AI4
6
-10V
7
8
9
10 11
DI1 DI2 DI3 +24V
NC
C
NO
X2 31 32 33
NC
C
R01
NO
51 52
X3
NO
C
R03
Fig. 35 Control board layout
41
Terminal connections
5-2
Section 5-2
Terminal connections
The terminal strip for connecting the control signals is accessible after opening the front panel.
The table describes the default functions for the signals. The inputs and outputs are programmable for other functions as described in chapter SECTION
11 page 91. For signal specifications refer to chapter SECTION 14 page 275.
Note The maximum total combined current for outputs 11, 20 and 21 is 100mA.
Table 16 Control signals
Terminal
Name
Function (Default)
Outputs
1
+10 V
+10 VDC supply voltage
6
-10 V
-10 VDC supply voltage
7
Common
Signal ground
11
+24 V
+24 VDC supply voltage
12
Common
Signal ground
15
Common
Signal ground
8
DigIn 1
RunL (reverse)
9
DigIn 2
RunR (forward)
10
DigIn 3
Off
16
DigIn 4
Off
17
DigIn 5
Off
18
DigIn 6
Off
19
DigIn 7
Off
22
DigIn 8
RESET
20
DigOut 1
Ready
21
DigOut 2
No trip
2
AnIn 1
Process Ref
3
AnIn 2
Off
4
AnIn 3
Off
5
AnIn 4
Off
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Analogue inputs
Analogue outputs
13
AnOut1
Min speed to max speed
14
AnOut2
0 to max torque
Relay outputs
31
N/C 1
32
COM 1
33
N/O 1
41
N/C 2
42
COM 2
43
N/O 2
42
Relay 1 output
Trip, active when the VSD is in a TRIP condition.
Relay 2 output
Run, active when the VSD is started.
Inputs configuration with the switches
Section 5-3
Table 16 Control signals
Terminal
Name
51
COM 3
52
N/O 3
Function (Default)
Relay 3 output
Off
Note N/C is opened when the relay is active and N/O is closed when the relay is
active.
5-3
Inputs configuration
with the switches
The switches S1 to S4 are used to set the input configuration for the 4 analogue inputs AnIn1, AnIn2, AnIn3 and AnIn4 as described in table 17. See Fig.
35 for the location of the switches.
Table 17 Switch settings
Input
Signal type
Voltage
AnIn1
Current (default)
Voltage
AnIn2
Current (default)
Voltage
AnIn3
Current (default)
Voltage
AnIn4
Current (default)
Switch
S1
I
U
S1
I
U
S2
I
U
S2
I
U
S3
I
U
S3
I
U
S4
I
U
S4
I
U
Note Scaling and offset of AnIn1 - AnIn4 can be configured using the software. See
menus [512], [515], [518] and [51B] in section 11-5, page 189.
Note The 2 analogue outputs AnOut 1 and AnOut 2 can be configured using the
software. See menu [530] section 11-5-3, page 203.
43
Connection example
5-4
Section 5-4
Connection example
Fig. 36 gives an overall view of a VSD connection example.
L1
L2
L3
PE
Alternative for
potentiometer control**
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 - 10 V
4 - 20 mA
78
79
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
15
16
17
18
19
22
U
V
W
RFIfilter
Optional***
DC+
Motor PTC
Optional
R
DC -
+10 VDC
AnIn 1: Reference
AnIn 2
AnIn 3
Common
AnIn 4
AnOut 1
-10 VDC
AnOut 2
Common
DigOut 1
DigIn 1:RunL*
DigOut 2
12
13
21
14
20
21
DigIn 2:RunR*
DigIn3
+24 VDC
Relay 1
Common
31
32
33
DigIn 4
DigIn 5
41
DigIn 6
Relay 2
DigIn 7
DigIn 8:Reset*
Relay 3
Comm. options
* Default setting
** The switch S1 is set to U
*** Optional terminals X1: 78-79 for connection
of Motor-PTC on sizes B, C and D.
Motor
Fieldbus option
or PC
42
43
51
52
Other options
Option board
NG_06-F27
Fig. 36 Connection example
44
Connecting the Control Signals
5-5
5-5-1
Section 5-5
Connecting the Control Signals
Cables
The standard control signal connections are suitable for stranded flexible wire
up to 1.5 mm2 and for solid wire up to 2.5 mm2.
Terminal 78 & 79 for
connection of Motor
PTC option
Control signals
Fig. 37 Connecting the control signals SX-D40P7 to SX-D47P5
Terminal 78 & 79 for
connection of Motor
PTC option
Control signals
45
Connecting the Control Signals
Section 5-5
Fig. 38 Connecting the control signals SX-D4011 to SX-D4022
Terminal 78&79 for
connection of Motor
PTC option
Terminal A- & B- for
connection of stand
by supply option
board
L1
L2
L3
PE
DC-
DC+
R
U
V
Control signals
Fig. 39 .Connecting the control signals SX-D4030 to SX-D4037
Control signals
Fig. 40 Connecting the control signals SX-D4045 to SX-D4090
Note The screening of control signal cables is necessary to comply with the
immunity levels given in the EMC Directive (it reduces the noise level).
Note Control cables must be separated from motor and mains cables.
46
Connecting the Control Signals
5-5-2
Section 5-5
Types of control signals
Always make a distinction between the different types of signals. Because the
different types of signals can adversely affect each other, use a separate
cable for each type. This is often more practical because, for example, the
cable from a pressure sensor may be connected directly to the variable speed
drive.
We can distinguish between the following types of control signals:
Analogue inputs
Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) normally used as control signals for speed, torque and PID feedback signals.
Analogue outputs
Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) which change slowly or only
occasionally in value. In general, these are control or measurement signals.
Digital
Voltage or current signals (0-10 V, 0-24 V, 0/4-20 mA) which can have only
two values (high or low) and only occasionally change in value.
Data
Usually voltage signals (0-5 V, 0-10 V) which change rapidly and at a high frequency, generally data signals such as RS232, RS485, Profibus, etc.
Relay
Relay contacts (0-250 VAC) can switch highly inductive loads (auxiliary relay,
lamp, valve, brake, etc.).
Signal type
Analogue
Digital
Data
Relay
Maximum wire size
Rigid cable:
0.14-2.5 mm2
Flexible cable:
0.14-1.5 mm2
Cable with ferrule:
0.25-1.5 mm2
Tightening torque
Cable type
Screened
Screened
0.5 Nm
Screened
Not screened
Example:
The relay output from a variable speed drive which controls an auxiliary relay
can, at the moment of switching, form a source of interference (emission) for a
measurement signal from, for example, a pressure sensor. Therefore it is
advised to separate wiring and screening to reduce disturbances.
47
Connecting the Control Signals
5-5-3
Section 5-5
Screening
For all signal cables the best results are obtained if the screening is connected to both ends: the VSD side and the at the source (e.g. PLC, or computer). See Fig. 41.
It is strongly recommended that the signal cables be allowed to cross mains
and motor cables at a 90 angle. Do not let the signal cable go in parallel with
the mains and motor cable.
5-5-4
Single-ended or double-ended connection?
In principle, the same measures applied to motor cables must be applied to all
control signal cables, in accordance with the EMC-Directives.
For all signal cables as mentioned in section 5-5-2 the best results are
obtained if the screening is connected to both ends. See Fig. 41.
Note Each installation must be examined carefully before applying the proper EMC
measurements.
Control board
Pressure
sensor
(example)
External control
(e.g. in metal housing)
Control consol
Fig. 41 Electro Magnetic (EM) screening of control signal cables.
5-5-5
Current signals ((0)4-20 mA)
A current signal like (0)4-20 mA is less sensitive to disturbances than a 0-10 V
signal, because it is connected to an input which has a lower impedance (250
) than a voltage signal (20 k). It is therefore strongly advised to use current
control signals if the cables are longer than a few metres.
48
Connecting options
5-5-6
Section 5-6
Twisted cables
Analogue and digital signals are less sensitive to interference if the cables
carrying them are “twisted”. This is certainly to be recommended if screening
cannot be used. By twisting the wires the exposed areas are minimised. This
means that in the current circuit for any possible High Frequency (HF) interference fields, no voltage can be induced. For a PLC it is therefore important that
the return wire remains in proximity to the signal wire. It is important that the
pair of wires is fully twisted over 360°.
5-6
Connecting options
The option cards are connected by the optional connectors X4 or X5 on the
control board see Fig. 35, page 41 and mounted above the control board. The
inputs and outputs of the option cards are connected in the same way as
other control signals.
49
Connecting options
50
Section 5-6
SECTION 6
Applications
6-1
Applications
This chapter contains tables giving an overview of many different applications/
duties in which it is suitable to use variable speed drives from OMRON. Further on you will find application examples of the most common applications
and solutions.
6-1-1
Pumps
Challenge
OMRON SX-V solution
Dry-running, cavitation and overheating damage the pump and cause downtime.
Sludge sticks to impeller when pump has been
running at low speed or been stationary for a
while. Reduces the pump’s efficiency.
Motor runs at same speed despite varying
demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and
equipment stressed.
Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked pipe,
a valve not fully opened or a worn impeller.
Water hammer damages the pump when
stopped. Mechanical stress on pipes, valves,
gaskets, seals.
Pump Curve Protection detects deviation.
Sends warning or activates safety stop.
Automatic pump rinsing function: pump is set to
run at full speed at certain intervals, then return
to normal speed.
PID continuously adapts pressure/flow to the
level required. Sleep function activated when
none is needed.
Pump Curve Protection detects deviation.
Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
6-1-2
411–419, 41C1– 41C9
362–368, 560, 640
320, 380, 342, 354
411–419, 41C1–41C9
331–336
Fans
Challenge
Starting a fan rotating in the wrong direction
can be critical, e.g. a tunnel fan in event of a
fire.
Draft causes turned off fan to rotate the wrong
way. Starting causes high current peaks and
mechanical stress.
Regulating pressure/flow with dampers causes
high energy consumption and equipment wear.
Motor runs at same speed despite varying
demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and
equipment stressed.
Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked filter,
a damper not fully opened or a worn belt.
6-1-3
Smooth linear stops protect the equipment.
Eliminates need for costly motorized valves.
Menu
OMRON SX-V solution
Fan is started at low speed to ensure correct
direction and proper function.
Motor is gradually slowed to complete stop
before starting. Avoids blown fuses and breakdown.
Automatic regulation of pressure/flow with
motor speed gives more exact control.
PID continuously adapts to the level required.
Sleep function is activated when none is
needed.
Load Curve Protection detects deviation. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
Menu
219, 341
219, 33A, 335
321, 354
320, 380, 342, 354
411–419, 41C1–41C9
Compressors
Challenge
OMRON SX-V solution
Overload situation is quickly detected and
safety stop can be activated to avoid breakdown.
Pressure is higher than needed, causing leaks, Load Curve Protection function detects deviastress on the equipment and excessive air use. tion. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
Motor runs at same speed when no air is comPID continuously adapts to the level required.
pressed. Energy is lost and equipment
Sleep function activated when none is needed.
stressed.
Process inefficiency and energy wasted due to Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviae.g. the compressor idling.
tion. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
Compressor is damaged when cooling media
enters the compressor screw.
Menu
411–41A
411–419, 41C1–41C9
320, 380, 342, 354
411–419, 41C1–41C9
51
Applications
6-1-4
Section 6-1
Blowers
Challenge
Difficult to compensate for pressure fluctuations. Wasted energy and risk of production
stop.
Motor runs at same speed despite varying
demands. Energy is lost and equipment
stressed.
Process inefficiency due to e.g. a broken
damper, a valve not fully opened or a worn belt.
52
OMRON SX-V solution
PID function continuously adapts pressure to
the level required.
Menu
320, 380
PID continuously adapts air flow to level
required. Sleep function activated when none is 320, 380, 342, 354
needed.
Load Curve Protection quickly detects devia411–419, 41C1–41C9
tion. Warning is sent or safety stop activated.
SECTION 7
Main Features
This chapter contains descriptions of the main features of the VSD.
7-1
Parameter sets
Parameter sets are used if an application requires different settings for different modes. For example, a machine can be used for producing different products and thus requires two or more maximum speeds and acceleration/
deceleration times. With the four parameter sets different control options can
be configured with respect to quickly changing the behaviour of the VSD. It is
possible to adapt the VSD online to altered machine behaviour. This is based
on the fact that at any desired moment any one of the four parameter sets can
be activated during Run or Stop, via the digital inputs or the control panel and
menu [241].
Each parameter set can be selected externally via a digital input. Parameter
sets can be changed during operation and stored in the control panel.
Note The only data not included in the parameter set is Motor data 1-4, (entered
separately), language, communication settings, selected set, local remote,
and keyboard locked.
Define parameter sets
When using parameter sets you first decide how to select different parameter
sets. The parameter sets can be selected via the control panel, via digital
inputs or via serial communication. All digital inputs and virtual inputs can be
configured to select parameter set. The function of the digital inputs is defined
in the menu [520].
Fig. 42 shows the way the parameter sets are activated via any digital input
configured to Set Ctrl 1 or Set Ctrl 2.
Parameter Set A
Run/Stop
Torques
Controllers
Limits/Prot.
-
Set B
Set C
Set D
-Max Alarm
11 +24 V
10 Set Ctrl1
16 Set Ctrl2
{
(NG06-F03_1)
Fig. 42 Selecting the parameter sets
53
Parameter sets
Section 7-1
Select and copy parameter set
The parameter set selection is done in menu [241], Select Set. First select the
main set in menu [241], normally A. Adjust all settings for the application. Usually most parameters are common and therefore it saves a lot of work by copying set A>B in menu [242]. When parameter set A is copied to set B you only
change the parameters in the set that need to be changed. Repeat for C and
D if used.
With menu [242], Copy Set, it is easy to copy the complete contents of a single parameter set to another parameter set. If, for example, the parameter
sets are selected via digital inputs, DigIn 3 is set to Set Ctrl 1 in menu [523]
and DigIn 4 is set to Set Ctrl 2 in menu [524], they are activated as in Table
18.
Activate the parameter changes via digital input by setting menu [241], Select
Set to DigIn.
Table 18 Parameter set
Parameter set
A
B
C
D
Set Ctrl 1
0
1
0
1
Set Ctrl 2
0
0
1
1
Note The selection via the digital inputs is immediately activated. The new
parameter settings will be activated on-line, also during Run.
Note The default parameter set is parameter set A.
Examples
Different parameter sets can be used to easily change the setup of a VSD to
adapt quickly to different application requirements. For example when
•
a process needs optimized settings in different stages of the process, to
- increase the process quality
- increase control accuracy
- lower maintenance costs
- increase operator safety
With these settings a large number of options are available. Some ideas are
given here:
Multi frequency selection
Within a single parameter set the 7 preset references can be selected via the
digital inputs. In combination with the parameter sets, 28 preset references
can be selected using all 5 digital inputs: DigIn1, 2 and 3 for selecting preset
reference within one parameter set and DigIn 4 and DigIn 5 for selecting the
parameter sets.
Bottling machine with 3 different products
Use 3 parameter sets for 3 different Jog reference speeds when the machine
needs to be set up. The 4th parameter set can be used for “normal” remote
control when the machine is running at full production.
Manual - automatic control
If in an application something is filled up manually and then the level is automatically controlled using PID regulation, this is solved using one parameter
set for the manual control and one for the automatic control.
54
Parameter sets
7-1-1
Section 7-1
One motor and one parameter set
This is the most common application for pumps and fans.
Once default motor M1 and parameter set A have been selected:
1. Enter the settings for motor data.
2. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs and outputs
7-1-2
One motor and two parameter sets
This application is useful if you for example have a machine running at two different speeds for different products.
Once default motor M1 is selected:
1. Select parameter set A in menu [241].
2. Enter motor data in menu [220].
3. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs and outputs.
4. If there are only minor differences between the settings in the parameter
sets, you can copy parameter set A to parameter set B, menu [242].
5. Enter the settings for parameters e.g. inputs and outputs.
Note Do not change motor data in parameter set B.
7-1-3
Two motors and two parameter sets
This is useful if you have a machine with two motors that can not run at the
same time, such as a cable winding machine that lifts up the reel with one
motor and then turns the wheel with the other motor.
One motor must stop before changing to an other motor.
1. Select parameter set A in menu [241].
2. Select motor M1 in menu [212].
3. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e.g. inputs and outputs.
4. Select parameter set B in menu [241].
5. Select M2 in menu [212].
6. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e.g. inputs and outputs.
7-1-4
Autoreset at trip
For several non-critical application-related failure conditions, it is possible to
automatically generate a reset command to overcome the fault condition. The
selection can be made in menu [250]. In this menu the maximum number of
automatically generated restarts allowed can be set, see menu [251], after
this the VSD will stay in fault condition because external assistance is
required.
Example
The motor is protected by an internal protection for thermal overload. When
this protection is activated, the VSD should wait until the motor is cooled down
enough before resuming normal operation. When this problem occurs three
times in a short period of time, external assistance is required.
The following settings should be applied:
•
Insert maximum number of restarts; set menu [251] to 3.
•
Activate Motor I2t to be automatically reset; set menu [25A] to 300 s.
•
Set relay 1, menu [551] to AutoRst Trip; a signal will be available when the
maximum number of restarts is reached and the VSD stays in fault condition.
•
The reset input must be constantly activated.
55
Parameter sets
7-1-5
Section 7-1
Reference priority
The active speed reference signal can be programmed from several sources
and functions. The table below shows the priority of the different functions
with regards to the speed reference.
Table 19 Reference priority
Jog Mode
7-1-6
Preset Reference
Motor Pot
Ref. Signal
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
Option cards
On
On/Off
On/Off
Jog Ref
Off
On
On/Off
Preset Ref
Off
Off
On
Motor pot commands
Preset references
The VSD is able to select fixed speeds via the control of digital inputs. This
can be used for situations where the required motor speed needs to be
adapted to fixed values, according to certain process conditions. Up to 7 preset references can be set for each parameter set, which can be selected via
all digital inputs that are set to Preset Ctrl1, Preset Ctrl2 or Preset Ctrl3. The
amount digital inputs used that are set to Preset Ctrl determines the number
of Preset References available; using 1 input gives 1 speed, using 2 inputs
gives 3 speeds and using 3 inputs gives 7 speeds.
Example
The use of four fixed speeds, at 50 / 100 / 300 / 800 rpm, requires the following settings:
•
Set DigIn 5 as first selection input; set [525] to Preset Ctrl1.
•
Set DigIn 6 as second selection input; set [526] to Preset Ctrl2.
•
Set menu [341], Min Speed to 50 rpm.
•
Set menu [362], Preset Ref 1 to 100 rpm.
•
Set menu [363], Preset Ref 2 to 300 rpm.
•
Set menu [364], Preset Ref 3 to 800 rpm.
With these settings, the VSD switched on and a RUN command given, the
speed will be:
56
•
50 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are low.
•
100 rpm, when DigIn 5 is high and DigIn 6 is low.
•
300 rpm, when DigIn 5 is low and DigIn 6 is high.
•
800 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are high.
Remote control functions
7-2
Section 7-2
Remote control functions
Operation of the Run/Stop/Enable/Reset functions
As default, all the run/stop/reset related commands are programmed for
remote operation via the inputs on the terminal strip (terminals 1-22) on the
control board. With the function Run/Stp Ctrl [215] and Reset Control [216],
this can be selected for keyboard or serial communication control.
Note The examples in this paragraph do not cover all possibilities. Only the most
relevant combinations are given. The starting point is always the default
setting (factory) of the VSD.
Default settings of the Run/Stop/Enable/Reset
functions
The default settings are shown in Fig. 43. In this example the VSD is started
and stopped with DigIn 2 and a reset after trip can be given with DigIn 8.
X1
1
12
13
2
3
4
5
6
14
15
16
17
18
7
8
RunR
9
Reset
+24 V
10
11
19
20
21
22
X
Fig. 43 Default setting Run/Reset commands
The inputs are default set for level-control. The rotation is determined by the
setting of the digital inputs.
Enable and Stop functions
Both functions can be used separately or simultaneously. The choice of which
function is to be used depends on the application and the control mode of the
inputs (Level/Edge [21A]).
Note In Edge mode, at least one digital input must be programmed to “stop”,
because the Run commands are only able to start the VSD.
Enable
Input must be active (HI) to allow any Run signal. If the input is made LOW,
the output of the VSD is immediately disabled and the motor will coast.
!Caution If the Enable function is not programmed to a digital input, it is considered to
be active internally.
Stop
If the input is low then the VSD will stop according to the selected stop mode
set in menu [33B] Stop Mode. Fig. 44 shows the function of the Enable and
the Stop input and the Stop Mode=Decel [33B].
To run the input must be high.
57
Remote control functions
Section 7-2
Note Stop Mode=Coast [33B] will give the same behaviour as the Enable input.
STOP
(STOP=DECEL)
OUTPUT
SPEED
t
ENABLE
OUTPUT
SPEED
t
(06-F104_NG)
(or if Spinstart is selected)
Fig. 44 Functionality of the Stop and Enable input
Reset and Autoreset operation
If the VSD is in Stop Mode due to a trip condition, the VSD can be remotely
reset by a pulse (“low” to “high” transition) on the Reset input, default on DigIn
8. Depending on the selected control method, a restart takes place as follows:
Level-control
If the Run inputs remain in their position the VSD will start immediately after
the Reset command is given.
Edge-control
After the Reset command is given a new Run command must be applied to
start the VSD again.
Autoreset is enabled if the Reset input is continuously active. The Autoreset
functions are programmed in menu Autoreset [250].
Note If the control commands are programmed for Keyboard control or Com,
Autoreset is not possible.
Run Inputs Level-controlled.
The inputs are set as default for level-control. This means that an input is activated by making the input continuously “High”. This method is commonly used
if, for example, PLCs are used to operate the VSD.
!Caution Level-controlled inputs DO NOT comply with the Machine Directive, if the
inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine.
The examples given in this and the following paragraphs follow the input
selection shown in Fig. 45.
58
Remote control functions
Section 7-2
X1
1
12
13
2
3
4
Stop
5
6
14
15
16
17
18
7
RunL
8
RunR
9
Enable
Reset
+24 V
10
11
19
20
21
22
Fig. 45 Example of wiring for Run/Stop/Enable/Reset inputs
The Enable input must be continuously active in order to accept any run-right
or run-left command. If both RunR and RunL inputs are active, then the VSD
stops according to the selected Stop Mode. Fig. 46 gives an example of a
possible sequence.
INPUTS
ENABLE
STOP
RUN R
RUN L
OUTPUT
STATUS
Right rotation
Left rotation
Standstill
(06-F103new_1)
Fig. 46 Input and output status for level-control
Run Inputs Edge-controlled
Menu [21A] Start signal Level/Edge must be set to Edge to activate edge control. This means that an input is activated by a “low” to “high” transition or vice
versa.
Note Edge-controlled inputs comply with the Machine Directive (see chapter EMC),
if the inputs are directly used for starting and stopping the machine.
59
Performing an Identification Run
Section 7-3
See Fig. 45. The Enable and Stop input must be active continuously in order
to accept any run-right or run-left command. The last edge (RunR or RunL) is
valid. Fig. 47 gives an example of a possible sequence.
INPUTS
ENABLE
STOP
RUN R
RUN L
OUTPUT
STATUS
Right rotation
Left rotation
Standstill
(06-F94new_1)
Fig. 47 Input and output status for edge-control
7-3
Performing an Identification Run
To get the optimum performance out of your VSD/motor combination, the VSD
must measure the electrical parameters (resistance of stator winding, etc.) of
the connected motor. See menu [229], Motor ID-Run.
60
Using the Control Panel Memory
7-4
Section 7-4
Using the Control Panel Memory
Data can be copied from the VSD to the memory in the control panel and vice
versa. To copy all data (including parameter set A-D and motor data) from the
VSD to the control panel, select Copy to CP[244], Copy to CP.
To copy data from the control panel to the VSD, enter the menu [245], Load
from CP and select what you want to copy.
The memory in the control panel is useful in applications with VSDs without a
control panel and in applications where several variable speed drives have the
same setup. It can also be used for temporary storage of settings. Use a control panel to upload the settings from one VSD and then move the control
panel to another VSD and download the settings.
Note Load from and copy to the VSD is only possible when the VSD is in stop
mode.
VSD
Fig. 48 Copy and load parameters between VSD and control panel
61
Load Monitor and Process Protection [400]
7-5
Section 7-5
Load Monitor and Process Protection [400]
7-5-1 Load Monitor [410]
The monitor functions enable the VSD to be used as a load monitor. Load
monitors are used to protect machines and processes against mechanical
overload and underload, such as a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming,
belt failure on a fan or a pump dry running. The load is measured in the VSD
by the calculated motor shaft torque. There is an overload alarm (Max Alarm
and Max Pre-Alarm) and an underload alarm (Min Alarm and Min Pre-Alarm).
The Basic Monitor type uses fixed levels for overload and underload (pre-)
alarms over the whole speed range. This function can be used in constant
load applications where the torque is not dependent on the speed, e.g. conveyor belt, displacement pump, screw pump, etc.
For applications with a torque that is dependent on the speed, the Load Curve
monitor type is preferred. By measuring the actual load curve of the process,
characteristically over the range of minimum speed to maximum speed, an
accurate protection at any speed can be established.
The max and min alarm can be set for a trip condition. The pre-alarms act as
a warning condition. All the alarms can be monitored on the digital or relay
outputs.
The autoset function automatically sets the 4 alarm levels whilst running:
maximum alarm, maximum pre-alarm, minimum alarm and minimum prealarm.
Fig. 49 gives an example of the monitor functions for constant torque applications.
62
100%
Default: TNOM or
Autoset: TMOMENTARY
Min PreAlarm
Min Alarm
Max PreAlarm
Max Alarm
[4191] MinAlarmMar (15%)
[4181] MinPreAlMar (10%)
[41B]
[4171] MaxPreAlMar (10%)
[4161] MaxAlarmMar (15%)
Torque [%]
[414] Start Delay (0.2s)
[4172] MaxPreAlDel (0.1s)
[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s)
[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min
[413] Ramp Alarm=On
Ramp-up phase
Must be elapsed before first (pre)alarm
[4192] MinAlarmDel (0.1s)
[4182] MinPreAlDel (0.1s)
[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max+Min
[413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off
Stationary phase
Must be Eint
E=-2
M=123
The value is then 123x10-2 = 1.23
Example of 15-bit fixed point format
The value 72.0 can be represented as the fixed point number 72. It is within
the range 0-32767, which means that the 15-bit fixed point format may be
used.
The value will then be represented as:
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
Where bit 15 indicates that we are using the fixed point format (F=0).
89
Description of the EInt formats
Section 10-6
Programming example:
typedef struct
{
int m:11; // mantissa, -1024..1023
int e: 4; // exponent -8..7
unsigned int f: 1; // format, 1->special emoint format
}
eint16;
//--------------------------------------------------------------------------unsigned short int float_to_eint16(float value)
{
eint16 etmp;
int dec=0;
while (floor(value) != value && dec<16)
{
dec++; value*=10;
}
if (value>=0 && value<=32767 && dec==0)
*(short int *)&etmp=(short int)value;
else if (value>=-1000 && value<0 && dec==0)
{
etmp.e=0;
etmp.f=1;
etmp.m=(short int)value;
}
else
{
etmp.m=0;
etmp.f=1;
etmp.e=-dec;
if (value>=0)
etmp.m=1; // Set sign
else
etmp.m=-1; // Set sign
value=fabs(value);
while (value>1000)
{
etmp.e++; // increase exponent
value=value/10;
}
value+=0.5; // round
etmp.m=etmp.m*value; // make signed
}
Rreturn (*(unsigned short int *)&etmp);
}
//--------------------------------------------------------------------------float eint16_to_float(unsigned short int value)
{
float f;
eint16 evalue;
evalue=*(eint16 *)&value;
if (evalue.f)
{
if (evalue.e>=0)
f=(int)evalue.m*pow10(evalue.e);
else
f=(int)evalue.m/pow10(abs(evalue.e));
}
else
f=value;
return f;
}
//---------------------------------------------------------------------------
90
SECTION 11
Functional Description
This chapter describes the menus and parameters in the software. You will
find a short description of each function and information about default values,
ranges, etc. There are also tables containing communication information. You
will find the Modbus, DeviceNet, EtherCAT and Fieldbus address for each
parameter as well as the enumeration for the data.
Note Functions marked with the sign cannot be changed during Run Mode.
Description of table layout
Menu no.
name
Default:
Selection or
range
Integer value of
selection
Menu
Description
Resolution of settings
The resolution for all range settings described in this chapter is 3 significant
digits. Exceptions are speed values which are presented with 4 significant digits. Table 23 shows the resolutions for 3 significant digits.
Table 23
3 Digit
0.01-9.99
10.0-99.9
100-999
1000-9990
10000-99900
Resolution
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
11-1 Preferred View [100]
This menu is displayed at every power-up. During operation, the menu [100]
will automatically be displayed when the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes. The automatic return function will be switched off when the Toggle and
Stop key is pressed simultaneously. As default it displays the reference and
current values.
100
Stp A
0rpm
0.0A
Menu [100], Preferred View displays the settings made in menu [110], 1st line,
and [120], 2nd line. See Fig. 74.
100
Stp A
Fig. 74
(1st Line)
(2nd Line)
Display functions
91
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
11-1-1 1st Line [110]
Sets the content of the upper row in the menu [100] Preferred View.
110 1st Line
Stp A Process Val
Default:
Dependent on menu
Process Val
0
Speed
1
Torque
2
Process Ref
3
Shaft Power
4
El Power
5
Current
6
Output volt
7
Frequency
8
DC Voltage
9
Heatsink Tmp
10
Motor Temp
11
VSD Status
12
Run Time
13
Energy
14
Mains Time
15
Process Val
Process value
Speed
Torque
Process reference
Shaft power
Electrical power
Current
Output voltage
Frequency
DC voltage
Heatsink temperature
Motor temperature
VSD status
Run Time
Energy
Mains time
Note The “Motor Temp” is only visible if you have the option PTC/PT100 card
installed and a PT100 input is selected in menu [236].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
43001
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
168/160
4bb9*
UInt
UInt
* This is a hexadecimal index number.
11-1-2 2nd Line [120]
Sets the content of the lower row in the menu [100] Preferred View. Same
selection as in menu [110].
120 2nd Line
Stp A
Current
Default:
Current
11-2 Main Setup [200]
The Main Setup menu contains the most important settings to get the VSD
operational and set up for the application. It includes different sub menus concerning the control of the unit, motor data and protection, utilities and automatic resetting of faults. This menu will instantaneously be adapted to build in
options and show the required settings.
92
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
11-2-1 Operation [210]
Selections concerning the used motor, VSD mode, control signals and serial
communication are described in this submenu and is used to set the VSD up
for the application.
Language [211]
Select the language used on the LC Display. Once the language is set, this
selection will not be affected by the Load Default command.
211 Language
Stp A
English
Default:
English
Svenska
Nederlands
Deutsch
Français
Español
Russian
Italiano
Cesky
Turkish
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
English
English selected
Swedish selected
Dutch selected
German selected
French selected
Spanish selected
Russian selected
Italian selected
Czech selected
Turkish selected
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43011
168/170
4bc3
UInt
UInt
Select Motor [212]
This menu is used if you have more than one motor in your application. Select
the motor to define. It is possible to define up to four different motors, M1 to
M4, in the VSD. For parameter set handling including Motor sets M1-M4 see
Chapter 11.2.6.
212 Select Motor
Stp A
M1
Default:
M1
M2
M3
M4
M1
0
1
2
3
Motor Data is connected to selected motor.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43012
168/171
4bc4
UInt
UInt
93
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Drive Mode [213]
This menu is used to set the control mode for the motor. Settings for the reference signals and read-outs is made in menu Process source, [321].
•
V/Hz Mode, output speed [721] in rpm, is used when several motors in parallel of different type or size are connected or if parallel motors are not
mechanically connected to the load.
213 Drive Mode
Stp A
V/Hz
Default:
V/Hz
V/Hz
All control loops are related to frequency control. In this
mode multi-motor applications are possible.
2
Note All the functions and menu read-outs with regard to
speed and rpm (e.g. Max Speed = 1500 rpm, Min
Speed=0 rpm, etc.) remain speed and rpm,
although they represent the output frequency.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43013
168/172
4bc5
UInt
UInt
Reference control [214]
To control the speed of the motor, the VSD needs a reference signal. This reference signal can be controlled by a remote source from the installation, the
keyboard of the VSD, or by serial or fieldbus communication. Select the
required reference control for the application in this menu.
214 Ref Control
Stp A
Remote
Default:
Remote
0
Keyboard
1
Com
2
Option
3
Remote
The reference signal comes from the analogue inputs of
the terminal strip (terminals 1-22).
Reference is set with the + and - keys on the Control Panel.
Can only be done in menu Set/View reference [310].
The reference is set via the serial communication (RS 485,
Fieldbus.) See section section 10-5 for further information.
The reference is set via an option. Only available if the
option can control the reference value.
Note If the reference is switched from Remote to Keyboard, the last remote
reference value will be the default value for the control panel.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
94
43014
168/173
4bc6
UInt
UInt
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Run/Stop Control [215]
This function is used to select the source for run and stop commands. Start/
stop via analogue signals can be achieved by combining a few functions. This
is described in the Chapter SECTION 7 page 53.
215 Run/Stp Ctrl
Stp A
Remote
Default:
Remote
0
Keyboard
1
Com
2
Option
3
Remote
The start/stop signal comes from the digital inputs of the
terminal strip (terminals 1-22).
Start and stop is set on the Control Panel.
The start/stop is set via the serial communication (RS 485,
Fieldbus.) See Fieldbus or RS232/485 option manual for
details.
The start/stop is set via an option.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43015
168/174
4bc7
UInt
UInt
Reset Control [216]
When the VSD is stopped due to a failure, a reset command is required to
make it possible to restart the VSD. Use this function to select the source of
the reset signal.
216 Reset Ctrl
Stp A
Remote
Default:
Remote
0
Keyboard
1
Com
2
Remote + Keyb
3
Com + Keyb
4
Rem+Keyb+Co
m
5
Option
6
Remote
The command comes from the inputs of the terminal strip
(terminals 1-22).
The command comes from the command keys of the Control Panel.
The command comes from the serial communication (RS
485, Fieldbus).
The command comes from the inputs of the terminal strip
(terminals 1-22) or the keyboard.
The command comes from the serial communication
(RS485, Fieldbus) or the keyboard.
The command comes from the inputs of the terminal strip
(terminals 1-22), the keyboard or the serial communication
(RS485, Fieldbus).
The command comes from an option. Only available if the
option can control the reset command.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43016
168/175
4bc8
UInt
UInt
95
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Local/Remote key function [217]
The Toggle key on the keyboard, see section 9-2-5, page 78, has two functions and is activated in this menu. As default the key is just set to operate as
a Toggle key that moves you easily through the menus in the toggle loop. The
second function of the key allows you to easily swap between Local and normal operation (set up via [214] and [215]) of the VSD. Local mode can also be
activated via a digital input. If both [2171] and [2172] is set to Standard, the
function is disabled.
2171 LocRefCtrl
Stp A
Standard
Default:
Standard
Remote
Keyboard
Com
0
1
2
3
Standard
Local reference control set via [214]
Local reference control via remote
Local reference control via keyboard
Local reference control via communication
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43009
168/168
4bc1
UInt
UInt
2172 LocRunCtrl
Stp A
Standard
Default:
Standard
Remote
Keyboard
Com
0
1
2
3
Standard
Local Run/Stop control set via [215]
Local Run/Stop control via remote
Local Run/Stop control via keyboard
Local Run/Stop control via communication
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43010
168/169
4bc2 x h
UInt
UInt
Lock Code? [218]
To prevent the keyboard being used or to change the setup of the VSD and/or
process control, the keyboard can be locked with a password. This menu,
Lock Code [218], is used to lock and unlock the keyboard. Enter the password
“291” to lock/unlock the keyboard operation. If the keyboard is not locked
(default) the selection “Lock Code?” will appear. If the keyboard is already
locked, the selection “Unlock Code?” will appear.
96
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
When the keyboard is locked, parameters can be viewed but not changed.
The reference value can be changed and the VSD can be started, stopped
and reversed if these functions are set to be controlled from the keyboard.
218 Lock Code?
Stp A
0
Default:
Range:
0
0–9999
Rotation [219]
Overall limitation of motor rotation direction
This function limits the overall rotation, either to left or right or both directions.
This limit is prior to all other selections, e.g.: if the rotation is limited to right, a
Run-Left command will be ignored. To define left and right rotation we assume
that the motor is connected U-U, V-V and W-W.
Speed Direction and Rotation
The speed direction can be controlled by:
•
RunR/RunL commands on the control panel.
•
RunR/RunL commands on the terminal strip (terminals 1-22).
•
Via the serial interface options.
•
The parameter sets.
Right
Left
Fig. 75
Rotation
In this menu you set the general rotation for the motor.
219 Rotation
Stp A
Default:
R
1
L
2
R+L
3
R+L
R+L
Speed direction is limited to right rotation. The input and
key RunL are disabled.
Speed direction is limited to left rotation. The input and key
RunR are disabled.
Both speed directions allowed.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43019
168/178
4bcb
UInt
UInt
97
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
11-2-2 Remote Signal Level/Edge [21A]
In this menu you select the way to control the inputs for RunR, RunL, Stop and
Reset that are operated via the digital inputs on the terminal strip. The inputs
are default set for level-control, and will be active as long as the input is made
and kept high. When edge-control is selected, the input will be activated by
the low to high transition of the input.
21A Level/Edge
Stp A
Level
Default:
Level
0
Edge
1
Level
The inputs are activated or deactivated by a continuous
high or low signal. Is commonly used if, for example, a PLC
is used to operate the VSD.
The inputs are activated by a transition; for Run and Reset
from “low” to “high”, for Stop from “high” to “low”.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
!Caution
43020
168/179
4bcc
UInt
UInt
Level controlled inputs DO NOT comply with the Machine Directive if the
inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine.
Note Edge controlled inputs can comply with the Machine Directive (see the
Chapter SECTION 8 page 73) if the inputs are directly used to start and stop
the machine.
98
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
11-2-3 Mains supply voltage [21B]
!Warning This menu must be set according to the VSD product lable and the supply
voltage used. Wrong setting might damage the VSD or brake resistor.
In this menu the nominal mains supply voltage connected to the VSD can be
selected. The setting will be valid for all parameter sets. The default setting,
Not defined, is never selectable and is only visible until a new value is
selected.
Once the supply voltage is set, this selection will not be affected by the Load
Default command [243].
Brake chopper activation level is adjusted using the setting of [21B].
Note The setting is affected by the Load from CP command [245] and if loading
parameter file via EmoSoftCom.
21B Supply Volts
Stp A Not defined
Default:
Not Defined
0
220-240 V
380-415 V
440-480 V
500-525 V
550-600 V
660-690 V
1
3
4
5
6
7
Not defined
Inverter default value used. Only valid if this parameter is
never set.
Only valid for SX-V-4 (400V)
Only valid for SX-V-4 (400V)
Only valid for SX-V-4 (400V)
Only valid for SX-V-6 (690V)
Only valid for SX-V-6 (690V)
Only valid for SX-V-6 (690V)
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43381
170/30
4d35
UInt
UInt
11-2-4 Motor Data [220]
In this menu you enter the motor data to adapt the VSD to the connected
motor. This will increase the control accuracy as well as different read-outs
and analogue output signals.
Motor M1 is selected as default and motor data entered will be valid for motor
M1. If you have more than one motor you need to select the correct motor in
menu [212] before entering motor data.
Note The parameters for motor data cannot be changed during run mode.
Note The default settings are for a standard 4-pole motor according to the nominal
power of the VSD.
Note Parameter set cannot be changed during run if the sets is set for different
motors.
Note Motor Data in the different sets M1 to M4 can be revert to default setting in
menu [243], Default>Set.
99
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
!Warning Enter the correct motor data to prevent dangerous situations and assure
correct control.
Motor Voltage [221]
Set the nominal motor voltage.
221 Motor Volts
400V
Stp A M1:
400 V for SX-V-4
690 V for SX-V-6
100-700 V
1V
Default:
Range:
Resolution
Note The Motor Volts value will always be stored as a 3 digit value with a resolution
of 1 V.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43041
168/200
4be1
Long,
1=0.1 V
EInt
Motor Frequency [222]
Set the nominal motor frequency
222 Motor Freq
50Hz
Stp A M1:
Default:
50 Hz
Range:
Resolution
24-300 Hz
1 Hz
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43042
168/201
4be2
Long, 1=1 Hz
EInt
Motor Power [223]
Set the nominal motor power. If parallel motors, set the value as sum of
motors power
223 Motor Power
Stp A M1: (PNOM)kW
Default:
Range:
Resolution
100
PNOMVSD
1W-150% x PNOM
3 significant digits
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Note The Motor Power value will always be stored as a 3 digit value in W up to 999
W and in kW for all higher powers.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43043
168/202
4be3
Long,
1=1 W
EInt
PNOM is the nominal VSD power.
Motor Current [224]
Set the nominal motor current. If parallel motors set the sum of the motor currents.
224 Motor Curr
(IMOT)A
Stp A M1:
IMOT (see note section 11-2-4, page 99)
25 - 150% x INOM
Default:
Range:
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43044
168/203
4be4
Long,
1=0.1 A
EInt
IMOT is the nominal VSD currentMotor
Speed [225]
Set the nominal asynchronous motor speed.
225 Motor Speed
Stp A M1: (nMOT)rpm
Default:
Range:
Resolution
nMOT (see note section 11-2-4, page 99)
50 - 18000 rpm
1 rpm, 4 sign digits
!Warning Do NOT enter a synchronous (no-load) motor speed.
Note Maximum speed [343] is not automatically changed when the motor speed is
changed.
Note Entering a wrong, too low value can cause a dangerous situation for the
driven application due to high speeds.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
43045
168/204
4be5
101
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
UInt
1=1 rpm
UInt
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Motor Poles [226]
When the nominal speed of the motor is 500 rpm, the additional menu for
entering the number of poles, [226], appears automatically. In this menu the
actual pole number can be set which will increase the control accuracy of the
VSD.
226 Motor Poles
Stp A M1:
Default:
Range:
4
4
2-144
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43046
168/205
4be6
Long, 1=1 pole
EInt
Motor Cos [227]
Set the nominal Motor cosphi (power factor).
227 Motor Cos
Cos
Stp A M1:
Default:
cosNOM (see note section 11-2-4, page 99)
Range:
0.50 - 1.00
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43047
168/206
4be7
Long, 1=0.01
EInt
Motor ventilation [228]
Parameter for setting the type of motor ventilation. Affects the characteristics
of the I2t motor protection by lowering the actual overload current at lower
speeds.
228 Motor Vent
Self
Stp A M1:
102
Default:
None
0
Self
1
Forced
2
Self
Limited I2t overload curve.
Normal I2t overload curve. Means that the motor stands
lower current at low speed.
Expanded I2t overload curve. Means that the motor stands
almost the whole current also at lower speed.
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43048
168/207
4be8
UInt
UInt
When the motor has no cooling fan, None is selected and the current level is
limited to 55% of rated motor current.
With a motor with a shaft mounted fan, Self is selected and the current for
overload is limited to 87% from 20% of synchronous speed. At lower speed,
the overload current allowed will be smaller.
When the motor has an external cooling fan, Forced is selected and the overload current allowed starts at 90% from rated motor current at zero speed, up
to nominal motor current at 70% of synchronous speed.
Fig. 76 shows the characteristics with respect for Nominal Current and Speed
in relation to the motor ventilation type selected.
xInom for I2t
Forced
1.00
0.90
0.87
Self
None
0.55
0.20
0.70
2.00
xSync Speed
Fig. 76
I2t curves
Motor Identification Run [229]
This function is used when the VSD is put into operation for the first time. To
achieve an optimal control performance, fine tuning of the motor parameters
using a motor ID run is needed. During the test run the display shows “Test
Run” blinking.
To activate the Motor ID run, select “Short” and press Enter. Then press RunL
or RunR on the control panel to start the ID run. If menu [219] Rotation is set
to L the RunR key is inactive and vice versa. The ID run can be aborted by
giving a Stop command via the control panel or Enable input. The parameter
will automatically return to OFF when the test is completed. The message
“Test Run OK!” is displayed. Before the VSD can be operated normally again,
press the STOP/RESET key on the control panel.
During the Short ID run the motor shaft does not rotate. The VSD measures
the rotor and stator resistance.
.
229 Motor ID-Run
Off
Stp A M1:
Default:
Off, see Note
103
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Off
0
Short
1
Not active
Parameters are measured with injected DC current. No
rotation of the shaft will occur.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43049
168/208
4be9
UInt
UInt
Note To run the VSD it is not mandatory for the ID RUN to be executed, but without
it the performance will not be optimal.
Note If the ID Run is aborted or not completed the message “Interrupted!” will be
displayed. The previous data do not need to be changed in this case. Check
that the motor data are correct.
Motor Sound [22A]
Sets the sound characteristic of the VSD output stage by changing the switching frequency and/or pattern. Generally the motor noise will go down at higher
switching frequencies.
22A Motor Sound
Stp A M1:
F
Default:
E
F
G
H
0
1
2
3
F
Switching frequency 1.5 kHz
Switching frequency 3 kHz
Switching frequency 6 kHz
Switching frequency 6 kHz, random frequency (+750 Hz)
Advanced
4
Switching frequency and PWM mode setup via [22E]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43050
168/209
4bea
UInt
UInt
Note At switching frequencies >3 kHz derating may become necessary.
Note If the heat sink temperature gets too high the switching frequency is
decreased to avoid tripping. This is done automatically in the VSD. The
default switching frequency is 3 kHz.
Encoder Feedback [22B]
Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This parameter enables or
disables the encoder feedback from the motor to the VSD.
22B Encoder
Stp A M1:
Default:
104
Off
Off
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
On
Off
0
1
Encoder feedback enabled
Encoder feedback disabled
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43051
168/210
4beb
UInt
UInt
Encoder Pulses [22C]
Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This parameter describes
the number of pulses per rotation for your encoder, i.e. it is encoder specific.
For more information please see the encoder manual.
22C Enc Pulses
1024
Stp A M1:
Default:
Range:
1024
5–16384
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43052
168/211
4bec
Long, 1=1 pulse
EInt
Encoder Speed [22D]
Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. This parameter shows the
measured motor speed. To check if the encoder is correctly installed, set
Encoder feedback [22B] to Off, run the VSD at any speed and compare with
the value in this menu. The value in this menu [22D] should be about the
same as the motor speed [712]. If you get the wrong sign for the value, swap
encoder input A and B.
22D Enc Speed
XXrpm
Stp A M1:
Unit:
Resolution:
rpm
speed measured via the encoder
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
42911
168/70
4b5f
Int
Int
Motor PWM [22E]
Menus for advanced setup of motor modulation properties (PWM = Pulse
105
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Width Modulation).
PWM Fswitch [22E1]
Set the PWM switching frequency of the VSD
22E1 PWM Fswitch
Stp A
3.00kHz
Default:
3.00 kHz
Range
1.50 - 6.00kHz
Resolution
0.01kHz
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43053
168/212
4bed
Long, 1=1Hz
EInt
PWM Mode [22E2]
22E2 PWM Mode
Stp A
Standard
Default:
Standard
Standard
0
Standard
Sine Filt
1
Sine Filter mode for use with output Sine Filters
Note Switching frequency is fixed when “Sine Filt” is selected. This means it is not
possible to control the switching frequency based on temperature.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43054
168/213
4bee
UInt
UInt
PWM Random [22E3]
22E3 PWM Random
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
Off
0
Random modulation is Off.
On
1
Random modulation is active. Random frequency variation
range is ± 1/8 of level set in [E22E1].
Communication information.
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
106
43055
168/214
4bef
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
UInt
UInt
Encoder Pulse counter [22F]
Only visible if the encoder option is installed. Adde menu/parameter for accumulated QEP (Quadrature Encoder Pulse) encoder pulses. Can be preset to
any value within format used (Int = 2 byte, Long = 4 byte).
22F Enc Puls Ctr
Stp A
0
Default:
0
Resolution
1
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
42912
168/71
4b60
Long, 1=1 quad encoder pulse
Int
Note For a 1024 pulse encoder [22F] will count 1024 * 4 = 4096 pulse per turn.
11-2-5 Motor Protection [230]
This function protects the motor against overload based on the standard
IEC60947-4-2.
Motor I2t Type [231]
The motor protection function makes it possible to protect the motor from
overload as published in the standard IEC 60947-4-2. It does this using Motor
I2t Current, [232] as a reference. The Motor I2t Time [233] is used to define
the time behaviour of the function. The current set in [232] can be delivered
infinite in time. If for instance in [233] a time of 1000 s is chosen the upper
curve of Fig. 77 is valid. The value on the x-axis is the multiple of the current
chosen in [232]. The time [233] is the time that an overloaded motor is
switched off or is reduced in power at 1.2 times the current set in [232].
231 Mot I2t Type
Stp A M1:
Trip
Default:
Off
0
Trip
1
Limit
2
Trip
I2t motor protection is not active.
When the I2t time is exceeded, the VSD will trip on “Motor
I2t”.
This mode helps to keep the inverter running when the
Motor I2t function is just before tripping the VSD. The trip is
replaced by current limiting with a maximum current level
set by the value out of the menu [232]. In this way, if the
reduced current can drive the load, the VSD continues running.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
43061
168/220
107
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
4bf5
UInt
UInt
Note When Mot I2t Type=Limit, the VSD can control the speed < MinSpeed to
reduce the motor current.
Motor I2t Current [232]
Sets the current limit for the motor I2t protection.
232 Mot I2t Curr
Stp A
100%
Default:
Range:
100% of IMOT
0–150% of IMOT (set in menu [224])
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43062
168/221
4bf6
Long, 1=1%
EInt
Note When the selection Limit is set in menu [231], the value must be above the noload current of the motor.
Motor I2t Time [233]
Sets the time of the I2t function. After this time the limit for the I2t is reached if
operating with 120% of the I2t current value. Valid when start from 0 rpm.
Note Not the time constant of the motor.
233 Mot I2t Time
Stp A M1:
60s
Default:
Range:
60 s
60–1200 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
108
43063
168/222
4bf7
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
100000
t [s]
10000
1000
1000 s (120%)
480 s (120%)
100
240 s (120%)
120 s (120%)
60 s (120%)
10
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
Actual output curent / I2t-current
Fig. 77
I2t function
Fig. 77 shows how the function integrates the square of the motor current
according to the Mot I2t Curr [232] and the Mot I2t Time [233].
When the selection Trip is set in menu [231] the VSD trips if this limit is
exceeded.
When the selection Limit is set in menu [231] the VSD reduces the torque if
the integrated value is 95% or closer to the limit, so that the limit cannot be
exceeded.
Note If it is not possible to reduce the current, the VSD will trip after exceeding
110% of the limit.
Example
In Fig. 77 the thick grey line shows the following example.
•
Menu [232] Mot I2t Curr is set to 100%.
1.2 x 100% = 120%
•
Menu [233] Mot I2t Time is set to 1000 s.
This means that the VSD will trip or reduce after 1000 s if the current is
1.2 times of 100% nominal motor current.
Thermal Protection [234]
Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. Set the PTC input for
thermal protection of the motor. The motor thermistors (PTC) must comply
with DIN 44081/44082. Please refer to the manual for the PTC/PT100 option
board.
Menu [234] PTC contains functions to enable or disable the PTC input. Here
you can select and activate PTC and/or PT100.
234 Thermal Prot
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
0
Off
PTC and PT100 motor protection are disabled.
109
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
PTC
1
PT100
2
PTC+PT100
3
Enables the PTC protection of the motor via the insulated
option board.
Enables the PT100 protection for the motor via the insulated option board.
Enables the PTC protection as well as the PT100 protection for the motor via the insulated option board.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43064
168/223
4bf8
UInt
UInt
Note PTC option and PT100 selections can only be selected in menu [234] if the
option board is mounted.
Note If you select the PTC option, the PT100 inputs are ignored
Motor Class [235]
Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. Set the class of motor
used. The trip levels for the PT100 sensor will automatically be set according
to the setting in this menu.
235 Mot Class
Stp A
F 140C
Default:
A 100C
E 115C
B 120C
F 140C
F Nema 145C
H 165C
F 140C
0
1
2
3
4
5
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43065
168/224
4bf9
UInt
UInt
Note This menu is only valid for PT 100.
PT100 Inputs [236]
Sets which of PT100 inputs should be used for thermal protection. Deselecting not used PT100 inputs on the PTC/PT100 option board in order to ignore
those inputs, i.e. extra external wiring is not needed if port is not used.
236 PT100 Inputs
Stp A PT100 1+2+3
Default:
Selection:
110
PT100 1+2+3
PT100 1, PT100 2, PT100 1+2, PT100 3, PT100 1+3,
PT100 2+3, PT100 1+2+3
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
PT100 1
PT100 2
PT100 1+2
PT100 3
PT100 1+3
PT100 2+3
PT100 1+2+3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Channel 1 used for PT100 protection
Channel 2 used for PT100 protection
Channel 1+2 used for PT100 protection
Channel 3 used for PT100 protection
Channel 1+3 used for PT100 protection
Channel 2+3 used for PT100 protection
Channel 1+2+3 used for PT100 protection
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43066
168/225
4bfa
UInt
UInt
Note This menu is only valid for PT100 thermal protection if PT100 is enabled in
menu [234].
Motor PTC [237]
For VSD sizes B to D there is optional possibility to directly connect motor
PTC (not to be mixed up with PTC/PT100 option board).
In this menu the internal motor PTC hardware option is enabled. This PTC
input complies with DIN 44081/44082. Please refer to the manual for the PTC/
PT100 option board for electrical specification.
This menu is only visible if a PTC (or resistor <2 kOhm) is connected to terminals X1: 78–79. See Chapter 5.4 and Chapter 5.5.1.
Note This function is not related to PTC/PT100 option board.
To enable the function:
1. Connect the thermistor wires to X1: 78–79 or for testing the input, connect
a resistor to the terminals. Use resistor value between 50 and 2000 ohm.
Menu [237] will now appear.
2. Enable input by setting menu [237] Motor PTC=On.
If enabled and <50 ohm a sensor error trip will occur. The fault message
“Motor PTC” is shown.
If the function is disabled and the PTC or resistor is removed, the menu will
disappear after the next power on.
237 Motor PTC
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
On
0
1
Off
Motor PTC protection is disabled
Motor PTC protection is enabled
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43067
168/226
4bfb
UInt
UInt
Note This option is only available for SX-D40P7 to SX-D4037
111
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
11-2-6 Parameter Set Handling [240]
There are four different parameter sets available in the VSD. These parameter
sets can be used to set the VSD up for different processes or applications
such as different motors used and connected, activated PID controller, different ramp time settings, etc.
A parameter set consists of all parameters with the exception of the menu
[211] Language, [217] Local Remote, [218] Lock Code, [220] Motor Data,
[241] Select Set, [260] Serial Communication and [21B] Mains supply voltage.
Note Actual timers are common for all sets. When a set is changed the timer
functionality will change according to the new set, but the timer value will stay
unchanged.
Select Set [241]
Here you select the parameter set. Every menu included in the parameter
sets is designated A, B, C or D depending on the active parameter set.
Parameter sets can be selected from the keyboard, via the programmable digital inputs or via serial communication. Parameter sets can be changed during
the run. If the sets are using different motors (M1 to M4) the set will be
changed only when the motor is stopped.
241 Select Set
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
A
B
C
D
0
1
2
3
DigIn
4
Com
5
Option
6
A
A
A, B, C, D, DigIn, Com, Option
Fixed selection of one of the 4 parameter sets A, B, C or D.
Parameter set is selected via a digital input. Define which
digital input in menu [520], Digital inputs.
Parameter set is selected via serial communication.
The parameter set is set via an option. Only available if the
option can control the selection.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43022
168/181
4bce
UInt
UInt
The active set can be viewed with function [721] VSD status.
Note Parameter set cannot be changed during run if the parameter set includes
change of the motor set (M2-M4).
Prepare parameter Set when different Motor data M1-M4:
1. Select desired parameter Set to be set in [241] A-D.
2. Select Motor Set [212] if other than the default Set M1.
3. Set relevant motor data in the Menu group [220].
4. Set other desired parameter settings to belong to this parameter Set.
To prepare a Set for another motor, repeat these steps.
112
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Copy Set [242]
This function copies the content of a parameter set into another parameter
set.
242 Copy Set
Stp A
Default:
A>B
A>C
A>D
B>A
B>C
B>D
C>A
C>B
C>D
D>A
D>B
D>C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
A>B
A>B
Copy set A to set B
Copy set A to set C
Copy set A to set D
Copy set B to set A
Copy set B to set C
Copy set B to set D
Copy set C to set A
Copy set C to set B
Copy set C to set D
Copy set D to set A
Copy set D to set B
Copy set D to set C
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
43021
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
168/180
4bcd
UInt
UInt
Note The actual value of menu [310] will not be copied into the other set.
A>B means that the content of parameter set A is copied into parameter set
B.
113
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Load Default Values Into Set [243]
With this function three different levels (factory settings) can be selected for
the four parameter sets. When loading the default settings, all changes made
in the software are set to factory settings. This function also includes selections for loading default settings to the four different Motor Data Sets.
243 Default>Set
Stp A
A
Default:
A
B
C
D
ABCD
0
1
2
3
4
A
Factory
5
M1
M2
M3
M4
M1234
6
7
8
9
10
Only the selected parameter set will revert to its default settings.
All four parameter sets will revert to the default settings.
All settings, except [211], [221]-[22D], [261], and [923], will
revert to the default settings.
Only the selected motor set will revert to its default settings.
All four motor sets will revert to default settnings.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43023
168/182
4bcf
UInt
UInt
Note Trip log hour counter and other VIEW ONLY menus are not regarded as
settings and will be unaffected.
Note “Factory” is selected, the message “Sure?” is displayed. Press the + key to
display “Yes” and then Enter to confirm.
Note The parameters in menu [220], Motor data, are not affected by loading
defaults when restoring parameter sets A–D.
Copy All Settings to Control Panel [244]
All the settings can be copied into the control panel including the motor data.
Start commands will be ignored during copying.
Default:
No Copy
Copy
0
1
244 Copy to CP
Stp A
No Copy
No Copy
Nothing will be copied
Copy all settings
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
114
43024
168/183
4bd0
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
UInt
UInt
Note The actual value of menu [310] will not be copied into control panel memory set.
Load Settings from Control Panel [245]
This function can load all four parameter sets from the control panel to the
VSD. Parameter sets from the source VSD are copied to all parameter sets in
the target VSD, i.e. A to A, B to B, C to C and D to D.
Start commands will be ignored during loading.
Default:
No Copy
A
B
C
D
ABCD
A+Mot
B+Mot
C+Mot
D+Mot
ABCD+Mot
M1
M2
M3
M4
M1M2M3M4
All
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
245 Load from CP
Stp A
No Copy
No Copy
Nothing will be loaded.
Data from parameter set A is loaded.
Data from parameter set B is loaded.
Data from parameter set C is loaded.
Data from parameter set D is loaded.
Data from parameter sets A, B, C and D are loaded.
Parameter set A and Motor data are loaded.
Parameter set B and Motor data are loaded.
Parameter set C and Motor data are loaded.
Parameter set D and Motor data are loaded.
Parameter sets A, B, C, D and Motor data are loaded.
Data from motor 1 is loaded.
Data from motor 2 is loaded.
Data from motor 3 is loaded.
Data from motor 4 is loaded.
Data from motor 1, 2, 3 and 4 are loaded.
All data is loaded from the control panel.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43025
168/184
4bd1
UInt
UInt
Note Loading from the control panel will not affect the value in menu [310].
11-2-7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions [250]
The benefit of this feature is that occasional trips that do not affect the process
will be automatically reset. Only when the failure keeps on coming back,
recurring at defined times and therefore cannot be solved by the VSD, will the
unit give an alarm to inform the operator that attention is required.
For all trip functions that can be activated by the user you can select to control
the motor down to zero speed according to set deceleration ramp to avoid
water hammer.
Also see section 12-2, page 261.
115
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Autoreset example:
In an application it is known that the main supply voltage sometimes disappears for a very short time, a so-called “dip”. That will cause the VSD to trip an
“Undervoltage alarm”. Using the Autoreset function, this trip will be acknowledged automatically.
•
Enable the Autoreset function by making the reset input continuously high.
•
Activate the Autoreset function in the menu [251], Number of trips.
•
Select in menus [252] to [25N] the Trip condition that are allowed to be
automatically reset by the Autoreset function after the set delay time has
expired.
Number of Trips [251]
Any number set above 0 activates the Autoreset. This means that after a trip,
the VSD will restart automatically according to the number of attempts
selected. No restart attempts will take place unless all conditions are normal.
If the Autoreset counter (not visible) contains more trips than the selected
number of attempts, the Autoreset cycle will be interrupted. No Autoreset will
then take place.
If there are no trips for more than 10 minutes, the Autoreset counter
decreases by one.
If the maximum number of trips has been reached, the trip message hour
counter is marked with an “A”.
If the Autoreset is full then the VSD must be reset by a normal Reset.
Example:
•
Autoreset = 5
•
Within 10 minutes 6 trips occur
•
At the 6th trip there is no Autoreset, because the Autoreset trip log contains 5 trips already.
•
To reset, apply a normal reset: set the reset input high to low and high
again to maintain the Autoreset function. The Autoreset counter is reset
(not visible).
251 No of Trips
Stp A
0
Default:
Range:
0 (no Autoreset)
0–10 attempts
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43071
168/230
4bff
UInt
UInt
Note An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp time.
116
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Over temperature [252]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
252 Overtemp
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43072
168/231
4c00
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Note An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp time.
Overvolt D [253]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
253 Overvolt D
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43075
168/234
4c03
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Note An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp time.
Overvolt G [254]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
254 Overvolt G
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
117
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43076
168/235
4c04
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Overvolt [255]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
255 Overvolt
Stp A
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43077
168/236
4c05
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Motor Lost [256]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active
256 Motor Lost
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Note Only visible when Motor Lost is selected in menu [423].
Communication information
118
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
43083
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
168/242
4c0b
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Locked Rotor [257]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
257 Locked Rotor
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43086
168/245
4c0c
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Power Fault [258]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
258 Power Fault
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43087
168/246
4c0f
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Undervoltage [259]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
259 Undervoltage
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
43088
168/247
119
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
4c10
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Motor I2t [25A]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25A Motor I2t
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43073
168/232
4c01
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Motor I2t Trip Type [25B]
Select the preferred way to react to a Motor I2t trip.
25B Motor I2t TT
Stp A
Trip
Default:
Trip
Deceleration
0
1
Trip
The motor will trip
The motor will decelerate
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43074
168/233
4c02
UInt
UInt
PT100 [25C]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25C PT100
Stp A
Default:
Off
1–3600
120
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Off
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43078
168/237
4c06
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
PT100 Trip Type [25D]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25D PT100 TT
Stp A
Trip
Default:
Selection:
Trip
Same as menu [25B]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43079
168/238
4c07
Uint
UInt
PTC [25E]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25E PTC
Stp A
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43084
168/243
4c0c
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
PTC Trip Type [25F]
Select the preferred way to react to a PTC trip.
25F PTC TT
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
Trip
Trip
Same as menu [25B]
121
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43085
168/244
4c0d
UInt
UInt
External Trip [25G]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25G Ext Trip
Stp A
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43080
168/239
4c08
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
External Trip Type [25H]
Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip.
25H Ext Trip TT
Stp A
Trip
Default:
Selection:
Trip
Same as menu [25B]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43081
168/240
4c09
UInt
UInt
Communication Error [25I]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25I Com Error
Stp A
Off
Default:
122
Off
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43089
168/248
4c11
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Communication Error Trip Type [25J]
Select the preferred way to react to a communication trip.
25J Com Error TT
Stp A
Trip
Default:
Selection:
Trip
Same as menu [25B]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43090
168/249
4c12
UInt
UInt
Min Alarm [25K]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25K Min Alarm
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43091
168/250
4c13
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
123
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Min Alarm Trip Type [25L]
Select the preferred way to react to a min alarm trip.
25L Min Alarm TT
Stp A
Trip
Default:
Selection:
Trip
Same as menu [25B]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43092
168/251
4c14
UInt
UInt
Max Alarm [25M]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25M Max Alarm
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
Off
0
1–
3600
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43093
168/252
4c15
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Max Alarm Trip Type [25N]
Select the preferred way to react to a max alarm trip.
25N Max Alarm TT
Stp A
Trip
Default:
Selection:
Trip
Same as menu [25B]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
124
43094
168/253
4c16
UInt
UInt
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Over current F [25O]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25O Over curr F
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43082
168/241
4c0a
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Pump [25P]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25P Pump
Stp A
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43095
168/254
4c17
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Over Speed [25Q]
Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. When the time delay has
elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25Q Over speed
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
43096
169/0
125
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
4c18
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
External Motor Temperature [25R]
Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. When the time delay
has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25R Ext Mot Temp
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43097
168/239
4c19
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
External Motor Trip Type [25S]
Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip.
25S Ext Mot TT
Stp A
Trip
Default:
Selection:
Trip
Same as menu [25B]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43098
168/240
4c1a
UInt
UInt
Liquid cooling low level [25T]
Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. When the time delay
has elapsed, the alarm will be reset if the function is active.
25T LC Level
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
1–3600
126
0
1–
3600
Off
Off
1–3600 s
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43099
169/3
4c1b
Long, 1=1 s
EInt
Liquid Cooling Low level Trip Type [25U]
Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip.
25U LC Level TT
Stp A
Trip
Default:
Selection:
Trip
Same as menu [25B]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43100
169/4
4c1c
UInt
UInt
Brake Fault [25V]
Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip, activate auto reset and
specify delay time.
25V
Stp A
Default
Brk Fault
Off
Off
Off
0
Autoreset not activated.
1 - 3600s
13600
s
Brake fault auto reset delay time.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43070
169/229
4bfe
Long, 1=1s
EInt
11-2-8 Serial Communication [260]
This function is to define the communication parameters for serial communication. There are two types of options available for serial communication,
RS232/485 (Modbus/RTU) and fieldbus modules (Profibus, DeviceNet and
Ethernet). For more information see chapter Serial communication and
respective option manual.
127
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Comm Type [261]
Select RS232/485 [262] or Fieldbus [263].
261 Com Type
RS232/485
Stp A
Default:
RS232/485
Fieldbus
0
1
RS232/485
RS232/485 selected
Fieldbus selected (Profibus, DeviceNet or Modbus/TCP)
Note Toggling the setting in this menu will perform a soft reset (re-boot) of the
Fieldbus module.
RS232/485 [262]
Press Enter to set up the parameters for RS232/485 (Modbus/RTU) communication.
262 RS232/485
Stp
Baud rate [2621]
Set the baud rate for the communication.
Note This baud rate is only used for the isolated RS232/485 option.
2621 Baudrate
Stp A
9600
Default:
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
9600
0
1
2
3
4
Selected baud rate
Address [2622]
Enter the unit address for the VSD.
Note This address is only used for the isolated RS232/485 option.
2622 Address
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
1
1
1–247
Fieldbus [263]
Press Enter to set up the parameters for fieldbus communication.
263 Fieldbus
Stp A
128
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Address [2631]
Enter/view the unit/node address of the VSD. Read & write access for Profibus, DeviceNet. Read only for EtherCAT.
2631
Stp A
Address
62
Default:
62
Range:
Profibus 0–126, DeviceNet 0–63
Node address valid for Profibus (RW), DeviceNet (RW) and EtherCAT (RO).
Process Data Mode [2632]
Enter the mode of process data (cyclic data). For further information, see the
Fieldbus option manual.
2632 PrData Mode
Stp A
Basic
Default:
None
Basic
0
4
Extended
8
Basic
Control/status information is not used.
4 byte process data control/status information is used.
4 byte process data (same as Basic setting) + additional
proprietary protocol for advanced users is used.
Read/Write [2633]
Select read/write to control the inverter over a fieldbus network. For further
information, see the Fieldbus option manual.
2633 Read/Write
Stp A
RW
Default:
RW
RW
0
Read
1
Valid for process data. Select R (read only) for logging process without writing process data. Select RW in normal cases to control inverter.
Additional Process Values [2634]
Define the number of additional process values sent in cyclic messages.
2634 AddPrValues
Stp A
0
Default:
Range:
0
0-8
Communication Fault [264]
Main menu for communication fault/warning settings. For further details
please see the Fieldbus option manual.
Communication Fault Mode [2641]]
Selects action if a communication fault is detected.
2641 ComFlt Mode
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
0
Off
No communication supervision.
129
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Trip
1
Warning
2
RS232/485 selected:
The VSD will trip if there is no communication for time set in
parameter [2642].
Fieldbus selected:
The VSD will trip if:
1. The internal communication between the control board
and fieldbus option is lost for time set in parameter [2642].
2. If a serious network error has occurred.
RS232/485 selected:
The VSD will give a warning if there is no communication
for time set in parameter [2642].
Fieldbus selected:
The VSD will give a warning if:
1. The internal communication between the control board
and fieldbus option is lost for time set in parameter [2642].
2. If a serious network error has occurred.
Note Menu [214] and/or [215] must be set to COM to activate the communication
fault function.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43037
168/196
4bdd
UInt
UInt
Communication Fault Time [2642]]
Defines the delay time for the trip/warning.
2642 ComFlt Time
Stp A
0.5s
Default:
Range:
0.5 s
0.1-15 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
130
43038
168/197
4bde
Long, 1=0.1 s
EInt
Main Setup [200]
Section 11-2
Ethernet [265]
Settings for Ethernet module (Modbus/TCP). For further information, see the
Fieldbus option manual.
Note The Ethernet module must be re-booted to activate the below settings. For
example by toggling parameter [261]. Non-initialized settings indicated by
flashing display text.
IP Address [2651]
2651 IP Address
000.000.000.000
Default:
0.0.0.0
MAC Address [2652]
2652 MAC Address
Stp A 000000000000
Default:
An unique number for the Ethernet module.
Subnet Mask [2653]
2653 Subnet Mask
0.000.000.000
Default:
0.0.0.0
Gateway [2654]
2654 Gateway
0.000.000.000
Default:
0.0.0.0
DHCP [2655]
2655 DHCP
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
Off
Off
On/Off
Fieldbus Signals [266]
Defines modbus mapping for additional process values. For further information, see the Fieldbus option manual.
FB Signal 1 - 16 [2661]-[266G]
Used to create a block of parameters which are read/written via communication. 1 to 8 read + 1 to 8 write parameters possible.
2661 FB Signal 1
Stp A
0
Default:
Range:
0
0-65535
131
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
42801-42816
167/215-167/230
4af1-4b00
UInt
UInt
FB Status [269]
Sub menus showing status of fieldbus parameters. Please see the Fieldbus
manual for detailed information.
269 FB Status
Stp
11-3 Process and Application Parameters [300]
These parameters are mainly adjusted to obtain optimum process or machine
performance.
The read-out, references and actual values depends on selected process
source, [321}:
Table 24
Selected process
source
Unit for reference and actual
value
Resolution
Speed
Torque
PT100
rpm
%
4 digits
3 digits
C
Frequency
Hz
3 digits
3 digits
11-3-1 Set/View Reference Value [310]
View reference value
As default the menu [310] is in view operation. The value of the active reference signal is displayed. The value is displayed according to selected process
source, [321] or the process unit selected in menu [322].
Set reference value
If the function Reference Control [214] is set to: Ref Control = Keyboard, the
reference value can be set in menu Set/View Reference [310] as a normal
parameter or as a motor potentiometer with the + and - keys on the control
panel depending on the selection of Keyboard Reference Mode in menu
[369]. The ramp times used for setting the reference value with the Normal
function selected in menu [369] are according to the set Acc Time [331] and
Dec Time [332]. The ramp times used for setting the reference value with the
MotPot function selected in [369] are according to the set Acc MotPot [333]
and Dec MotPot [334]. Menu [310] displays on-line the actual reference value
according to the Mode Settings in Table 24.
310 Set/View ref
Stp
0rpm
Default:
Dependent on:
Speed mode
132
0 rpm
Process Source [321] and Process Unit [322]
0 - max speed [343]
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
Torque mode
Other modes
0 - max torque [351]
Min according to menu [324] - max according to menu [325]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
42991
168/150
4baf
Long
EInt
Note The actual value in menu [310] is not copied, or loaded from the control panel
memory when Copy Set [242], Copy to CP [244] or Load from CP [245] is
performed.
Note If the MotPot function is used, the reference value ramp times are according to
the Acc MotPot [333] and Dec MotPot [334] settings. Actual speed ramp will
be limited according to Acc Time [331] and Dec Time [332].
Note Write access to this parameter is only allowed when menu“Ref Control [214]
is set to Keyboard. When Reference control is used, see section 10.5
Reference signal.
11-3-2 Process Settings [320]
With these functions, the VSD can be set up to fit the application. The menus
[110], [120], [310], [362]-[368] and [711] use the process unit selected in [321]
and [322] for the application, e.g. rpm, bar or m3/h. This makes it possible to
easily set up the VSD for the required process requirements, as well as for
copying the range of a feedback sensor to set up the Process Value Minimum
and Maximum in order to establish accurate actual process information.
Process Source [321]
Select the signal source for the process value that controls the motor. The
Process Source can be set to act as a function of the process signal on AnIn
F(AnIn), a function of the motor speed F(Speed), a function of the shaft torque
F(Torque) or as a function of a process value from serial communication
F(Bus). The right function to select depends on the characteristics and behaviour of the process. If the selection Speed, Torque or Frequency is set, the
VSD will use speed, torque or frequency as reference value.
Example
An axial fan is speed-controlled and there is no feedback signal available. The
process needs to be controlled within fixed process values in “m3/hr” and a
process read-out of the air flow is needed. The characteristic of this fan is that
the air flow is linearly related to the actual speed. So by selecting F(Speed) as
the Process Source, the process can easily be controlled.
The selection F(xx) indicates that a process unit and scaling is needed, set in
menus [322]-[328]. This makes it possible to e.g. use pressure sensors to
measure flow etc. If F(AnIn) is selected, the source is automatically connected
to the AnIn which has Process Value as selected.
321 Proc Source
Stp A
Speed
Default:
F(AnIn)
Speed
0
1
Speed
Function of analogue input. E.g. via PID control, [330].
Speed as process reference1.
133
Process and Application Parameters [300]
PT100
F(Speed)
F(Bus)
Frequency
1.
Section 11-3
3
4
6
7
Temperature as process reference.
Function of speed
Function of communication reference
Frequency as process reference1.
Only when Drive mode [213] is set to Speed or V/Hz.
Note When PT100 is selected, use PT100 channel 1 on the PTC/PT100 option
board.
Note If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu [321] Proc Source, menus
[322] - [328] are hidden.
Note If F (Bus) is chosen in menu [321]see section 10.5.1 Process value.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43302
169/206
4ce6
UInt
UInt
Process Unit [322]
322 Proc Unit
Stp A
rpm
Default:
Off
%
°C
°F
bar
Pa
Nm
Hz
rpm
m3/h
gal/h
ft3/h
User
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
rpm
No unit selection
Percent
Degrees Centigrade
Degrees Fahrenheit
bar
Pascal
Torque
Frequency
Revolutions per minute
9
10
11
12
Cubic meters per hour
Gallons per hour
Cubic feet per hour
User defined unit
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43303
169/207
4ce7
UInt
UInt
User-defined Unit [323]
This menu is only displayed if User is selected in menu [322]. The function
enables the user to define a unit with six symbols. Use the Prev and Next key
to move the cursor to required position. Then use the + and - keys to scroll
134
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
down the character list. Confirm the character by moving the cursor to the
next position by pressing the Next key.
No. for serial
comm.
Character
Character
No. for serial
comm.
Space
0–9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
Ü
V
W
X
Y
Z
Å
Ä
Ö
a
á
b
c
d
e
é
ê
ë
f
g
h
i
0
1–10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
m
n
ñ
o
ó
ô
p
q
r
s
t
u
ü
v
w
x
y
z
å
ä
ö
!
¨
#
$
%
&
·
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
^
_
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
í
54
103
j
55
2
104
135
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
No. for serial
comm.
Character
k
l
Character
3
56
57
No. for serial
comm.
105
Example:
Create a user unit named kPa.
1. When in the menu [323] press the + key to show the cursor.
2. Press the NEXT key to move the cursor to the right most position.
3. Press the + key until the character a is displayed.
4. Press the PREVIOUS key.
5. Then press the + key until P is displayed and press the PREVIOUS key.
6. Repeat until you have entered kPa, confirm with the ENTER key.
323 User Unit
Stp A
Default:
No characters shown
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43304-43309
169/208-169/213
4ce8-4ced
UInt
UInt
When sending a unit name you send one character at a time starting at the
right most position.
Process Min [324]
This function sets the minimum process value allowed.
324 Process Min
Stp A
0
Default:
Range:
0
0.000-10000 (Speed, Torque, F(Speed), F(Torque))
-10000– +10000 (F(AnIn, PT100, F(Bus))
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
136
43310
169/214
4cee
Long, 1=0.001
EInt
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
Process Max [325]
This menu is not visible when speed, torque or frequency is selected. The
function sets the value of the maximum process value allowed.
325 Process Max
Stp A
0
Default:
Range:
0
0.000-10000
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43311
169/215
4cef
Long, 1=0.001
EInt
Ratio [326]
This menu is not visible when speed, frequency or torque is selected. The
function sets the ratio between the actual process value and the motor speed
so that it has an accurate process value when no feedback signal is used. See
Fig. 78.
326 Ratio
Stp A
Default:
Linear
Quadratic
0
1
Linear
Linear
Process is linear related to speed/torque
Process is quadratic related to speed/torque
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43312
169/216
4cf0
UInt
UInt
137
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
Process
unit
Process
Max
[325]
Ratio=Linear
Ratio=Quadratic
Process
Min
[324]
Min
Speed
[341]
Fig. 78
Speed
Max
Speed
[343]
Ratio
F(Value), Process Min [327]
This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offers you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by scaling the process values. The process values are scaled by linking them to known data in the VSD. With
F(Value), Proc Min [327] the precise value at which the entered Process Min
[324] is valid can be entered.
Note If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu [321] Proc Source, menus
[322]- [328] are hidden.
327 F(Val) PrMin
Stp A
Min
Default:
Min
Max
0.000-10000
-1
-2
01000
0
Min
According to Min Speed setting in [341].
According to Max Speed setting in [343].
0.000-10000
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43313
169/217
4cf1
Long, 1=1 rpm
EInt
F(Value), Process Max [328]
This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It offers you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by scaling the process values. The process values are scaled by linking them to known data in the VSD. With
F(Value), Proc Max the precise value at which the entered Process Max [525]
is valid can be entered.
138
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
Note If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu [321] Proc Source, menus
[322]- [328] are hidden.
328 F(Val) PrMax
Stp A
Max
Default:
Min
Max
0.000-10000
-1
-2
01000
0
Max
Min
Max
0.000-10000
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43314
169/218
4cf2
Long, 1=1 rpm
EInt
Example
A conveyor belt is used to transport bottles. The required bottle speed needs
to be within 10 to 100 bottles/s. Process characteristics:
10 bottles/s = 150 rpm
100 bottles/s = 1500 rpm
The amount of bottles is linearly related to the speed of the conveyor belt.
Set-up:
Process Min [324] = 10
Process Max [325] = 100
Ratio [326] = linear
F(Value), ProcMin [327] = 150
F(Value), ProcMax [328] = 1500
With this set-up, the process data is scaled and linked to known values which
results in an accurate control.
F(Value)
PrMax 1500
[328]
Linear
F(Value
PrMin 150
[327]
Bottles/s
10
Process Min [324]
100
Process Max [325]
Fig. 79
139
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
11-3-3 Start/Stop settings [330]
Submenu with all the functions for acceleration, deceleration, starting, stopping, etc.
Acceleration Time [331]
The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to accelerate from 0 rpm to nominal motor speed.
Note If the Acc Time is too short, the motor is accelerated according to the Torque
Limit. The actual Acceleration Time may then be longer than the value set.
331 Acc Time
Stp A
10.0s
Default:
Range:
10.0 s
0.50–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43101
169/5
4c1d
Long, 1=0.01 s
EInt
Fig. 80 shows the relationship between nominal motor speed/max speed and
the acceleration time. The same is valid for the deceleration time.
rpm
Nominal
Speed
Max
Speed
100% nMOT
80% nMOT
(06-F12)
Fig. 80
8s
10s
t
Acceleration time and maximum speed
Fig. 81 shows the settings of the acceleration and deceleration times with
respect to the nominal motor speed.
140
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
rpm
Nom. Speed
Acc Time [331]
Dec Time [332]
(NG_06-F11)
Fig. 81
Acceleration and deceleration times
Deceleration Time [332]
The deceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to decelerate from nominal motor speed to 0 rpm.
332 Dec Time
Stp A
10.0s
Default:
Range:
10.0 s
0.50–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43102
169/6
4c1e
Long, 1=0.01 s
EInt
Note If the Dec Time is too short and the generator energy cannot be dissipated in
a brake resistor, the motor is decelerated according to the overvoltage limit.
The actual deceleration time may be longer than the value set.
Acceleration Time Motor Potentiometer [333]
It is possible to control the speed of the VSD using the motor potentiometer
function. This function controls the speed with separate up and down commands, over remote signals. The MotPot function has separate ramps settings
which can be set in Acc MotPot [333] and Dec MotPot [334].
If the MotPot function is selected, this is the acceleration time for the MotPot
up command. The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the
motor potentiometer value to increase from 0 rpm to nominal speed.
333 Acc MotPot
Stp A
16.0s
Default:
Range:
16.0 s
0.50–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
43103
169/7
4c1f
141
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Section 11-3
Long, 1=0.01 s
EInt
Deceleration Time Motor Potentiometer [334]
If the MotPot function is selected, this is the deceleration time for the MotPot
down command. The deceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the
motor potentiometer value to decrease from nominal speed to 0 rpm.
334 Dec MotPot
Stp A
16.0s
Default:
Range:
16.0 s
0.50–3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43104
169/8
4c20
Long, 1=0.01
EInt
Acceleration Time to Minimum Speed [335]
If minimum speed, [341]>0 rpm, is used in an application, the VSD uses separate ramp times below this level. With Acc>MinSpeed [335] and DecMin Spd
Stp A
10.0s
Default:
Range:
10.0 s
0.50-3600 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
142
43105
169/9
4c21
Long, 1=0.01
EInt
Process and Application Parameters [300]
Section 11-3
rpm
Max speed
[343]
Motor Speed 3000
[225]
Min speed
300
[341]
time
Fig. 82
Calculation example of accelerating times (graphics not proportional)
Example
Motor speed [225]: 3000 rpm
Minimum speed [341]: 600 rpm
Maximum speed [343]: 3000 rpm
Acceleration time [331]: 10 seconds
Deceleration time [332]: 10 seconds
Acc>Min speed [335]: 40 seconds
DecMin speed
[335]. Calculated as following:
600 rpm is 20% of 3000 rpm => 20% of 40 s = 8 s.
B. The acceleration continues from minimum speed level 600 rpm to maximum speed level 3000 rpm with acceleration rate according to ramp time
Acceleration time [331]. Calculate by following:
3000 - 600 = 2400 rpm which is 80 % of 3000 rpm => acceleration time is
80% x 10 s = 8 s.
This means that the total acceleration time from 0 - 3000 rpm will take 8 +
8 = 16 seconds.
Deceleration Time from Minimum Speed [336]
If a minimum speed is programmed, this parameter will be used to set the
deceleration time from the minimum speed to 0 rpm at a stop command. The
ramp time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to decelerate from the
nominal motor speed to 0 rpm.
336 Dec0
Brake relay
Brake acknowledge
Brake Trip
<33H
33H
<33H
**
Brake warning
Brake Fault trip time
During stop
During run
* Memorized load torque level, if function activated with parameter [33I] Release Torque
** Time for operator to set down the load
Fig. 86
Principle of brake operation for fault during run and during stop
11-3-5 Speed [340]
Menu with all parameters for settings regarding to speeds, such as Min/Max
speeds, Jog speeds, Skip speeds.
Minimum Speed [341]
Sets the minimum speed. The minimum speed will operate as an absolute
lower limit. Used to ensure the motor does not run below a certain speed and
to maintain a certain performance.
341
Stp A
Default:
Range:
Dependent on:
Min Speed
0rpm
0 rpm
0 - Max Speed
Set/View ref [310]
Note A lower speed value than the set minimum speed can be shown in the display
due to motor slip.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
43121
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
169/25
4c31
Int, 1=1 rpm
Int, 1=1 rpm
Stop/Sleep when less than Minimum Speed [342]
With this function it is possible to put the VSD in “sleep mode” when it is running at minimum speed for the length of time set in menu “Stp
AnIn Max
Ref
0
10V
(NG_06-F25)
Fig. 110 Inverted reference
AnIn1 Bipol [5133]
This menu is automatically displayed if AnIn1 Setup is set to User Bipol mA or
User Bipol V. The window will automatically show mA or V range according to
193
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
selected function. The range is set by changing the positive maximum value;
the negative value is automatically adapted accordingly. Only visible if [512] =
User Bipol mA/V. The inputs RunR and RunL input need to be active, and
Rotation, [219], must be set to “R+L”, to operate the bipolar function on the
analogue input.
5133 AnIn1 Bipol
Stp A
10.00V
Default:
Range:
0.00–10.00 V
0.0–20.0 mA, 0.00–10.00 V
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43205
169/109
4c85
Long
EInt
AnIn1 Function Min [5134]
With AnIn1 Function Min the physical minimum value is scaled to selected
process unit. The default scaling is dependent of the selected function of
AnIn1 [511].
5134 AnIn1 FcMin
Stp A
Min
Default:
Min
Max
User-defined
0
1
2
Min
Min value
Max value
Define user value in menu [5135]
Table 26 shows corresponding values for the min and max selections depending on the function of the analogue input [511].
Table 26
AnIn Function
Speed
Torque
Process Ref
Process Value
Min
Min Speed [341]
0%
Process Min [324]
Process Min [324]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
194
43206
169/110
4c86
UInt
UInt
Max
Max Speed [343]
Max Torque [351]
Process Max [325]
Process Max [325]
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
AnIn1 Function Value Min [5135]
With AnIn1 Function ValMin you define a user-defined value for the signal.
Only visible when user-defined is selected in menu [5134].
5135 AnIn1 VaMin
Stp A
0.000
Default:
Range:
0.000
-10000.000 – 10000.000
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43541
170/190
4dd5
Long,
Speed 1=1 rpm
Torque 1=1%
Process val 1=0.001
EInt
AnIn1 Function Max [5136]
With AnIn1 Function Max the physical maximum value is scaled to selected
process unit. The default scaling is dependent of the selected function of
AnIn1 [511]. See Table 26.
5136 AnIn1 FcMax
Stp A
Max
Default:
Min
Max
User-defined
0
1
2
Max
Min value
Max value
Define user value in menu [5137]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43207
169/111
4c87
Long,
Speed/Torque 1=1 rpm or %.
Other 1= 0.001
EInt
AnIn1 Function Value Max [5137]
With AnIn1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined value for the signal.
Only visible when user-defined is selected in menu [5136].
5137 AnIn1 VaMax
Stp A
0.000
Default:
Range:
0.000
-10000.000 – 10000.000
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
43551
170/200
195
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
4ddf
Long,
Speed 1=1 rpm
Torque 1=1%
Process val 1=0.001
EInt
Note With AnIn Min, AnIn Max, AnIn Function Min and AnIn Function Max settings,
loss of feedback signals (e.g. voltage drop due to long sensor wiring) can be
compensated to ensure an accurate process control.
Example:
Process sensor is a sensor with the following specification:
Range:0–3 bar
Output:2–10 mA
Analogue input should be set up according to:
[512] AnIn1 Setup = User mA
[5131] AnIn1 Min = 2 mA
[5132] AnIn1 Max = 10 mA
[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = User-defined
[5135] AnIn1 VaMin = 0.000 bar
[5136] AnIn 1 Function Max = User-defined
[5137] AnIn1 VaMax = 3.000 bar
AnIn1 Operation [5138]
5138 AnIn1 Oper
Stp A
Add+
Default:
Add+
0
Sub-
1
Add+
Analogue signal is added to selected function in menu
[511].
Analogue signal is subtracted from selected function in
menu [511].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43208
169/112
4c88
UInt
UInt
AnIn1 Filter [5139]
If the input signal is unstable (e.g. fluctuation reference value), the filter can be
used to stabilize the signal. A change of the input signal will reach 63% on
AnIn1 within the set AnIn1 Filter time. After 5 times the set time, AnIn1 will
have reached 100% of the input change. See Fig. 111.
5139 AnIn1 Filt
Stp A
0.1s
Default:
Range:
0.1 s
0.001 – 10.0 s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
196
43209
169/113
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
4c89
Long, 1=0.001 s
EInt
AnIn change
Original input signal
100%
Filtered AnIn signal
63%
5XT
T
Fig. 111
AnIn1 Enable [513A]
Parameter for enable/disable analogue input selection via digital inputs (DigIn
set to function AnIn Select).
513A AnIn1 Enabl
Stp A
On
Default:
On
!DigIn
DigIn
0
1
2
On
AnIn1 is always active
AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is low.
AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is high.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
AnIn1 43210
AnIn1 169/114
4c8a
UInt
UInt
AnIn2 Function [514]
Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2.
Same function as AnIn1 Func [511].
514 AnIn2 Fc
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
Off
Off
Same as in menu [511]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
43211
169/115
4c8b
197
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Section 11-5
UInt
UInt
AnIn2 Setup [515]
Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2.
Same functions as AnIn1 Setup [512].
515 AnIn2 Setup
Stp A
4-20mA
Default:
Dependent on
Selection:
4 – 20 mA
Setting of switch S2
Same as in menu [512].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43212
169/116
4c8c
UInt
UInt
AnIn2 Advanced [516]
Same functions and submenus as under AnIn1 Advanced [513].
516 AnIn2 Advan
Stp A
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43213–43220
43542
43552
169/117–124
170/191
170/201
4c8d-4c94
4dd6
4de0
UInt
UInt
AnIn3 Function [517]
Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 3.
Same function as AnIn1 Func [511].
517 AnIn3 Fc
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
198
Off
Same as in menu [511]
Off
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43221
169/125
4c95
UInt
UInt
AnIn3 Setup [518]
Same functions as AnIn1 Setup [512].
518 AnIn3 Setup
Stp A
4-20mA
Default:
Dependent on
Selection:
4–20 mA
Setting of switch S3
Same as in menu [512].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43222
169/126
4c96
UInt
UInt
AnIn3 Advanced [519]
Same functions and submenus as under AnIn1 Advanced [513].
519 AnIn3 Advan
Stp A
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
43223–43230
43543
43553
169/127–169/134
170/192
170/202
4c97-4c9e
4dd7
4de1
AnIn4 Function [51A]
Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 4.
Same function as AnIn1 Func [511].
51A AnIn4 Fc
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
Off
Off
Same as in menu [511]
199
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43231
169/135
4c9f
UInt
UInt
AnIn4 Set-up [51B]
Same functions as AnIn1 Setup [512].
51B AnIn4 Setup
Stp A
4-20mA
Default:
Dependent on
Selection:
4-20 mA
Setting of switch S4
Same as in menu [512].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43232
169/136
4ca0
UInt
UInt
AnIn4 Advanced [51C]
Same functions and submenus as under AnIn1 Advanced [513].
51C AnIn4 Advan
Stp A
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
43233–43240
43544
43554
169/137–144
170/193
170/203
4ca1-4ca8
4dd8
4de2
11-5-2 Digital Inputs [520]
Submenu with all the settings for the digital inputs.
Note Additional inputs will become available when the I/O option boards are
connected.
Digital Input 1 [521]
To select the function of the digital input.
On the standard control board there are eight digital inputs.
200
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
If the same function is programmed for more than one input that function will
be activated according to “OR” logic if nothing else is stated.
521 DigIn 1
Stp A
Default:
Off
0
Ext. Trip
3
Stop
4
Enable
5
RunR
6
RunL
7
Reset
9
Preset Ctrl1
Preset Ctrl2
Preset Ctrl3
10
11
12
MotPot Up
13
MotPot Down
14
Pump1 Feedb
15
Pump2 Feedb
16
Pump3 Feedb
17
Pump4 Feedb
18
Pump5 Feedb
19
Pump6 Feedb
20
Timer 1
21
Timer 2
22
Set Ctrl 1
23
Set Ctrl 2
24
Mot PreMag
25
Jog
26
RunL
RunL
The input is not active.
Be aware that if there is nothing connected to the input, the
VSD will trip at “External trip” immediately.
NOTE: The External Trip is active low.
NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic.
Stop command according to the selected Stop mode in
menu [33B].
NOTE: The Stop command is active low.
NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic.
Enable command. General start condition to run the VSD. If
made low during running the output of the VSD is cut off
immediately, causing the motor to coast to zero speed.
NOTE: If none of the digital inputs are programmed to
“Enable”, the internal enable signal is active.
NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic.
Run Right command. The output of the VSD will be a clockwise rotary field.
Run Left command. The output of the VSD will be a
counter-clockwise rotary field.
Reset command. To reset a Trip condition and to enable the
Autoreset function.
To select the Preset Reference.
To select the Preset Reference.
To select the Preset Reference.
Increases the internal reference value according to the set
AccMotPot time [333]. Has the same function as a “real”
motor potentiometer, see Fig. 92.
Decreases the internal reference value according to the set
DecMotPot time [334]. See MotPot Up.
Feedback input pump1 for Pump/Fan control and informs
about the status of the auxiliary connected pump/fan.
Feedback input pump 2 for Pump/Fan control and informs
about the status of the auxiliary connected pump/fan.
Feedback input pump3 for Pump/Fan control and informs
about the status of the auxiliary connected pump/fan.
Feedback input pump 4 for Pump/Fan control and informs
about the status of the auxiliary connected pump/fan.
Feedback input pump5 for Pump/Fan control and informs
about the status of the auxiliary connected pump/fan.
Feedback input pump 6 for Pump/Fan control and informs
about the status of the auxiliary connected pump/fan.
Timer 1 Delay [643] will be activated on the rising edge of
this signal.
Timer 2 Delay [653] will be activated on the rising edge of
this signal.
Activates other parameter set. See Table 27 for selection
possibilities.
Activates other parameter set. See Table 27 for selection
possibilities.
Pre-magnetises the motor. Used for faster motor start.
To activate the Jog function. Gives a Run command with
the set Jog speed and Direction, page 155.
201
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
Ext Mot Temp
27
Loc/Rem
28
AnIn select
29
LC Level
30
Brk Ackn
31
Be aware that if there is nothing connected to the input, the
VSD will trip at “External Motor Temp” immediately.
NOTE: The External Motor Temp is active low.
Activate local mode defined in [2171] and [2172].
Activate/deactivate analogue inputs defined in [513A],
[516A], [519A] and [51CA]
Liquid cooling low level signal.
NOTE: The Liquid Cooling Level is active low.
Brake acknowledge input for Brake Fault control. Function
is activated via this selection see menu [33H]
Note For bipol function, input RunR and RunL needs to be active and Rotation,
[219] must be set to “R+L”.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43241
169/145
4ca9
UInt
UInt
Table 27
Parameter Set
A
B
C
D
Set Ctrl 1
Set Ctrl 2
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Note To activate the parameter set selection, menu 241 must be set to DigIn.
Digital Input 2 [522] to Digital Input 8 [528]
Same function as DigIn 1 [521]. Default function for DigIn 8 is Reset. For DigIn
3 to 7 the default function is Off.
522 DigIn 2
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
RunR
RunR
Same as in menu [521]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43241–43248
169/146–169/152
4ca9-4cb0
UInt
UInt
Additional digital inputs [529] to [52H]
Additional digital inputs with I/O option board installed, B1 DigIn 1 [529] - B3
DigIn 3 [52H]. B stands for board and 1 to 3 is the number of the board which
202
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
is related to the position of the I/O option board on the option mounting plate.
The functions and selections are the same as DigIn 1 [521].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43501–43509
170/150–170/158
4dad-4db5
Int
Int
11-5-3 Analogue Outputs [530]
Submenu with all settings for the analogue outputs. Selections can be made
from application and VSD values, in order to visualize actual status. Analogue
outputs can also be used as a mirror of the analogue input. Such a signal can
be used as:
•
a reference signal for the next VSD in a Master/Slave configuration (see
Fig. 112).
•
a feedback acknowledgement of the received analogue reference value.
AnOut1 Function [531]
Sets the function for the Analogue Output 1. Scale and range are defined by
AnOut1 Advanced settings [533].
531 AnOut1 Fc
Stp A
Speed
Default:
Process Val
Speed
Torque
Process Ref
Shaft Power
Frequency
Current
El power
Output volt
DC-voltage
AnIn1
AnIn2
AnIn3
AnIn4
Speed Ref
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Torque Ref
15
Speed
Actual process value according to Process feedback signal.
Actual speed.
Actual torque.
Actual process reference value.
Actual shaft power.
Actual frequency.
Actual current.
Actual electrical power.
Actual output voltage.
Actual DC link voltage.
Mirror of received signal value on AnIn1.
Mirror of received signal value on AnIn2.
Mirror of received signal value on AnIn3.
Mirror of received signal value on AnIn4.
Actual internal speed reference Value after ramp and V/Hz.
Actual torque reference value
(=0 in V/Hz mode)
Note When selections AnIn1, AnIn2 …. AnIn4 is selected, the setup of the AnOut
(menu [532] or [535]) has to be set to 0-10V or 0-20mA. When the AnOut
Setup is set to e.g. 4-20mA, the mirroring is not working correct.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
43251
169/155
4cb3
203
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
UInt
UInt
AnOut 1 Setup [532]
Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration.
532 AnOut1 Setup
Stp A
4-20mA
Default:
4–20mA
0
0–20mA
1
User mA
2
User Bipol mA
3
0-10V
4
2–10V
5
User V
6
User Bipol V
7
4-20mA
The current output has a fixed threshold (Live Zero) of 4
mA and controls the full range for the output signal. See
Fig. 109.
Normal full current scale configuration of the output that
controls the full range for the output signal. See Fig. 108.
The scale of the current controlled output that controls the
full range for the output signal. Can be defined by the
advanced AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus.
Sets the output for a bipolar current output, where the scale
controls the range for the output signal. Scale can be
defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol.
Normal full voltage scale configuration of the output that
controls the full range for the output signal. See Fig. 108.
The voltage output has a fixed threshold (Live Zero) of 2 V
and controls the full range for the output signal. See Fig.
109.
The scale of the voltage controlled output that controls the
full range for the output signal. Can be defined by the
advanced AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus.
Sets the output for a bipolar voltage output, where the scale
controls the range for the output signal. Scale can be
defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Ref.
VSD 1
Master
43252
169/156
4cb4
UInt
UInt
Ref.
VSD 2
Slave
AnOut
Fig. 112
AnOut1 Advanced [533]
With the functions in the AnOut1 Advanced menu, the output can be completely defined according to the application needs. The menus will automati-
204
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
cally be adapted to “mA” or “V”, according to the selection in AnOut1 Setup
[532].
533 AnOut 1 Adv
Stp A
AnOut1 Min [5331]
This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or User V is selected in
menu AnOut 1 Setup [532]. The menu will automatically adapt to current or
voltage setting according to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = User
mA/V.
5331 AnOut 1 Min
Stp A
4mA
Default:
Range:
4 mA
0.00 – 20.00 mA, 0 – 10.00 V
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43253
169/157
4cb5
Long, 1=0.01
EInt
AnOut1 Max [5332]
This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or User V is selected in
menu AnOut1 Setup [532]. The menu will automatically adapt to current or
voltage setting according to the selected setup. Only visible if [532] = User
mA/V.
5332 AnOut 1 Max
Stp
20.0mA
Default:
Range:
20.00 mA
0.00–20.00 mA, 0–10.00 V
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43254
169/158
4cb6
Long, 1=0.01
EInt
AnOut1 Bipol [5333]
Automatically displayed if User Bipol mA or User Bipol V is selected in menu
AnOut1 Setup. The menu will automatically show mA or V range according to
the selected function. The range is set by changing the positive maximum
value; the negative value is automatically adapted accordingly. Only visible if
[512] = User Bipol mA/V.
5333 AnOut1Bipol
Stp -10.00-10.00V
Default:
Range:
-10.00–10.00 V
-10.00–10.00 V, -20.0–20.0 mA
205
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43255
169/159
4cb7
Long, 1=0.01
EInt
AnOut1 Function Min [5334]
With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is scaled to selected
presentation. The default scaling is dependent of the selected function of
AnOut1 [531].
5334 AnOut1FCMin
Stp A
Min
Default:
Min
Max
User-defined
0
1
2
Min
Min value
Max value
Define user value in menu [5335]
Table 28 shows corresponding values for the min and max selections depending on the function of the analogue output [531].
Table 28
AnOut Function
Min Value
Max Value
Process Value
Speed
Torque
Process Ref
Shaft Power
Process Min [324]
Min Speed [341]
0%
Process Min [324]
0%
Process Max [325]
Max Speed [343]
Max Torque [351]
Process Max [325]
Motor Power [223]
Frequency
Current
El Power
Output Voltage
DC voltage
AnIn1
AnIn2
AnIn3
AnIn4
0 Hz
0A
0W
0V
0V
AnIn1 Function Min
AnIn2 Function Min
AnIn3 Function Min
AnIn4 Function Min
Motor Frequency [222]
Motor Current [224]
Motor Power [223]
Motor Voltage [221]
1000 V
AnIn1 Function Max
AnIn2 Function Max
AnIn3 Function Max
AnIn4 Function Max
*) Fmin is dependent on the set value in menu Minimum Speed [341].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43256
169/160
4cb8
Long,
1=0.1 W, 0.1 Hz, 0.1 A, 0.1 V or 0.001
EInt
Example
Set the AnOut function for Motorfrequency to 0Hz, set AnOut functionMin
[5334] to “User-defined” and AnOut1 VaMin[5335] = 0.0. This results in an
analogue output signal from 0/4 mA to 20mA: 0 Hz to Fmot.
206
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
This principle is valid for all Min to Max settings.
AnOut1 Function Value Min [5335]
With AnOut1 Function VaMin you define a user-defined value for the signal.
Only visible when user-defined is selected in menu [5334].
5335 AnOut1VaMin
Stp A
0.000
Default:
Range:
0.000
-10000.000–10000.000
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43545
170/194
4dd9
Long,
Speed 1=1 rpm
Torque 1=1%
Process val 1=0.001
EInt
AnOut1 Function Max [5336]
With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is scaled to selected
presentation. The default scaling is dependent on the selected function of
AnOut1 [531]. See Table 28.
5336 AnOut1FCMax
Stp A
Max
Default:
Min
Max
User defined
0
1
2
Max
Min value
Max value
Define user value in menu [5337]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43257
169/161
4cb9
Long, 0.001
EInt
Note It is possible to set AnOut1 up as an inverted output signal by setting AnOut1
Min > AnOut1 Max. See Fig. 110.
AnOut1 Function Value Max [5337]
With AnOut1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined value for the signal.
Only visible when user-defined is selected in menu [5334].
5337 AnOut1VaMax
Stp A
0.000
Default:
Range:
0.000
-10000.000–10000.000
207
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43555
170/204
4de3
Long,
Speed 1=1 rpm
Torque 1=1%
Process val 1=0.001
EInt
AnOut2 Function [534]
Sets the function for the Analogue Output 2.
534 AnOut2 Fc
Stp A
Torque
Default:
Selection:
Torque
Same as in menu [531]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43261
169/165
4cbd
UInt
UInt
AnOut2 Setup [535]
Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration for analogue output 2.
535 AnOut2 Setup
Stp A
4-20mA
Default:
Selection:
4-20mA
Same as in menu [532]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43262
169/166
4cbe
UInt
UInt
AnOut2 Advanced [536]
Same functions and submenus as under AnOut1 Advanced [533].
536 AnOut2 Advan
Stp A
208
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
43263–43267
43546
43556
169/167–169/171
170/195
170/205
4cbf-4cc3
4dda
4de4
11-5-4 Digital Outputs [540]
Submenu with all the settings for the digital outputs.
Digital Out 1 [541]
Sets the function for the digital output 1.
Note The definitions described here are valid for the active output condition.
541 DigOut 1
Stp A
Ready
Default:
Off
0
Ready
Output is not active and constantly low.
Output is made constantly high, i.e. for checking circuits
and trouble shooting.
Running. The VSD output is active = produces current for
the motor.
The VSD output is not active.
The output frequency=0±0.1Hz when in Run condition.
The speed is increasing or decreasing along the acc. ramp
dec. ramp.
The output = Reference.
The frequency is limited by the Maximum Speed.
No Trip condition active.
A Trip condition is active.
Autoreset trip condition active.
A Limit condition is active.
A Warning condition is active.
The VSD is ready for operation and to accept a start command. This means that the VSD is powered up and healthy.
The torque is limited by the torque limit function.
On
1
Run
2
Stop
0Hz
3
4
Acc/Dec
5
At Process
At Max spd
No Trip
Trip
AutoRst Trip
Limit
Warning
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Ready
13
T= Tlim
14
I>Inom
15
Brake
16
Sgnl0.5%), i.e. forward/clockwise direction.
Negative speed (0.5%), i.e. reverse counter clockwise
direction.
Fieldbus communication active.
Brk Fault
88
Tripped on brake fault (not released)
BrkNotEngage
89
Warning and continued operation (keep torque) due to
Brake not engaged during stop.
Option
90
Failure occured on in built-in option board.
CA3
91
Analog comparator 3 output
!A3
92
Analog comparator 3 inverted output
CA4
93
Analog comparator 3 output
!A4
94
Analog comparator 3 inverted output
CD3
95
Digital comparator 3 output
!D3
96
Digital comparator 3 inverted output
CD4
97
Digital comparator 4 output
!D4
98
Digital comparator 4 inverted output
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43271
169/175
4cc7
UInt
UInt
Digital Out 2 [542]
Note The definitions described here are valid for the active output condition.
Sets the function for the digital output 2.
542 DigOut2
Stp A
Brake
Default:
Selection:
Brake
Same as in menu [541]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43272
169/176
4cc8
UInt
UInt
211
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
11-5-5 Relays [550]
Submenu with all the settings for the relay outputs. The relay mode selection
makes it possible to establish a “fail safe” relay operation by using the normal
closed contact to function as the normal open contact.
Note Additional relays will become available when I/O option boards are connected.
Maximum 3 boards with 3 relays each.
Relay 1 [551]
Sets the function for the relay output 1. Same function as digital output 1 [541]
can be selected.
551 Relay 1
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
Trip
Trip
Same as in menu [541]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43273
169/177
4cc9
UInt
UInt
Relay 2 [552]
Note The definitions described here are valid for the active output condition.
Sets the function for the relay output 2.
552 Relay 2
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
Run
Run
Same as in menu [541]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43274
169/178
4cca
UInt
UInt
Relay 3 [553]
Sets the function for the relay output 3.
553 Relay 3
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
212
Off
Same as in menu [541]
Off
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43275
169/179
4ccb
UInt
UInt
Board Relay [554] to [55C]
These additional relays are only visible if an I/O option board is fitted in slot 1,
2, or 3. The outputs are named B1 Relay 1–3, B2 Relay 1–3 and B3 Relay 1–
3. B stands for board and 1–3 is the number of the board which is related to
the position of the I/O option board on the option mounting plate.
Note Visible only if optional board is detected or if any input/output is activated.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
170/160–170/168
4db7-4dbf
UInt
Modbus format
UInt
43511–43519
213
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
Relay Advanced [55D]
This function makes it possible to ensure that the relay will also be closed
when the VSD is malfunctioning or powered down.
Example
A process always requires a certain minimum flow. To control the required
number of pumps by the relay mode NC, the e.g. the pumps can be controlled
normally by the pump control, but are also activated when the variable speed
drive is tripped or powered down.
55D Relay Adv
Stp A
Relay 1 Mode [55D1]
55D1 Relay Mode
Stp A
N.O
Default:
N.O
0
N.C
1
N.O
The normal open contact of the relay will be activated when
the function is active.
The normally closed contact of the relay will act as a normal open contact. The contact will be opened when function is not active and closed when function is active.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43276
169/180
4ccc
UInt
UInt
Relay Modes [55D2] to [55DC]
Same function as for relay 1 mode [55D1].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
214
43277–43278,
43521–43529
169/181–169/182,
170/170–170/178
4ccd-4cce
4dc1-4dc9
UInt
UInt
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
Section 11-5
11-5-6 Virtual Connections [560]
Functions to enable eight internal connections of comparator, timer and digital
signals, without occupying physical digital in/outputs. Virtual connections are
used to wireless connection of a digital output function to a digital input function. Available signals and control functions can be used to create your own
specific functions.
Example of start delay
The motor will start in RunR 10 seconds after DigIn1 gets high. DigIn1 has a
time delay of 10 s.
Menu
[521]
[561]
[562]
[641]
[642]
[643]
Parameter
DigIn1
VIO 1 Dest
VIO 1 Source
Timer1 Trig
Timer1 Mode
Timer1 Delay
Setting
Timer 1
RunR
T1Q
DigIn 1
Delay
0:00:10
Note When a digital input and a virtual destination are set to the same function, this
function will act as an OR logic function.
Virtual Connection 1 Destination [561]
With this function the destination of the virtual connection is established.
When a function can be controlled by several sources, e.g. VC destination or
Digital Input, the function will be controlled in conformity with “OR logic”. See
DigIn for descriptions of the different selections.
561 VIO 1 Dest
Stp A
Off
Default:
Selection:
Off
Same selections as for Digital Input 1, menu [521].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43281
169/185
4cd1
UInt
UInt
Virtual Connection 1 Source [562]
With this function the source of the virtual connection is defined. See DigOut 1
for description of the different selections.
562 VIO 1 Source
Stp A
Off
Default:
Selection:
Off
Same as for menu [541].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
43282
169/186
215
I/Os and Virtual Connections [500]
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Section 11-5
4cd2
UInt
UInt
Virtual Connections 2-8 [563] to [56G]
Same function as virtual connection 1 [561] and [562].
Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 Destination.
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43283, 43285, 43287, 43289, 43291, 43293, 43295
169/ 187, 189, 191, 193, 195, 197, 199
4cd3, 4cd5, 4cd7, 4cd9, 4cdb, 4cdd, 4cdf
UInt
UInt
Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 Source.
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
216
43284, 43286, 43288, 43290, 43292, 43294, 43296
169/ 188, 190, 192, 194, 196, 198, 200
4cd4, 4cd6, 4cd8, 4cda, 4cdc, 4cde, 4ce0
UInt
UInt
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
11-6 Logical Functions and Timers [600]
With the Comparators, Logic Functions and Timers, conditional signals can
be programmed for control or signalling features. This gives you the ability to
compare different signals and values in order to generate monitoring/controlling features.
11-6-1 Comparators [610]
The comparators available make it possible to monitor different internal signals and values, and visualize via digital output or a contact, when a specific
value or status is reached or established.
Analog comparators [611]-[614]
There are 4 analogue comparators that compare any available analogue
value (including the analogue reference inputs) with two adjustable levels.The
two levels available are Level HI and Level LO. there are two analogue comparator types selectable, an analogue comparator with hysteresis and an analogue window comparator.
The analogue hysteresis type compararator uses the two available levels to
create a hysteresis for the comparator between setting and resetting the output. This function gives a clear diference in switching levels, which lets the
process adapt until a certain action is started. With such a hysteresis, even an
unstable analogue signal can be monitored without getting a nervous comparator output signal. Another feature is the possibility to get a fixed indication
that a certain level has been passed. The comparator can latch by setting
Level LO to a higher value than Level HI.
The analogue window comparator uses the two available levels to define the
window in which the analogue value should be within for setting the comparator output.
The input analogue value of the comparator can also be selected as bipolar,
i.e. treated as signed value or unipolar, i.e. treated as absolute value.
Digital comparators [615]
There are 4 digital comparators that compare any available digital signal.
The output signals of these comparators can be logically tied together to yield
a logical output signal.
All the output signals can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs or
used as a source for the virtual connections [560].
CA1 Setup [6111]
Analaog comparator 1, parameter group.
Analog comparator 1, Value [6111]
Selection of the analogue value for Analogue Comparator 1 (CA1).
Analogue comparator 1 compares the selectable analogue value in menu
[61111] with the constant Level HI in menu [6112] and constant Level LO in
menu [6113]. If Bipolar type [6115] input signal is selected then the comparison is made with sign otherwise if unipolar is selected then comparison is
made with absolute values.
For Hysteresis comparartor type [6114], when the value exceeds the upper
limit level high, the output signal CA1 is set high and !A1 low, see Fig. 113.
When the value decreases below the lower limit, the output signal CA1 is set
low and !A1 high.
The output signal can be programmed as a virtual connection source and to
the digital or relay outputs.
217
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Analogue value:
Menu [6111]
Signal:CA1
Adjustable Level HI.
Menu [6112]
0
Adjustable Level LO.
Menu [6113]
1
(NG_06-F125)
Fig. 113 Analogue Comparator type Hysteresis
For Window comparator type [6114], when the value is between the lower and
upper levels, the output signal value CA1 is set high and !A1 low. When the
output is outside the band of lower and upper levels, the output CA1 is set to
low and !A1 high.
Level High [6112]
+
AND
An Value [6111]
+
-
Level Low [6113]
Fig. 114 Analog comparator type Window.
6111 CA1 Value
Stp A
Speed
Default:
Process Val
Speed
Torque
Shaft Power
El Power
Current
Output Volt
Frequency
DC Voltage
Heatsink Tmp
PT100_1
PT100_2
PT100_3
Energy
Run Time
Mains Time
AnIn1
AnIn2
AnIn3
AnIn4
Process Ref
Process Err
218
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Speed
Set by Process settings [321] and [322]
rpm
%
kW
kW
A
V
Hz
V
°C
°C
°C
°C
kWh
h
h
%
%
%
%
Set by Process settings [321] and [322]
Signal CA1
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43401
170/50
4d49
UInt
UInt
Example
Create automatic RUN/STOP signal via the analogue reference signal. Analogue current reference signal, 4-20 mA, is connected to Analogue Input 1.
AnIn1 Setup, menu [512] = 4-20 mA and the threshold is 4 mA. Full scale
(100%) input signal on AnIn 1 = 20 mA. When the reference signal on AnIn1
increases 80% of the threshold (4 mA x 0.8 = 3.2 mA), the VSD will be set in
RUN mode. When the signal on AnIn1 goes below 60% of the threshold (4
mA x 0.6 = 2.4 mA) the VSD is set to STOP mode. The output of CA1 is used
as a virtual connection source that controls the virtual connection destination
RUN.
Menu
Function
Setting
511
512
341
343
AnIn1 Function
AnIn1 Set-up
Min Speed
Max Speed
Process reference
4-20 mA, threshold is 4 mA
0
1500
6111
6112
6113
6114
561
562
215
CA1 Value
CA1 Level HI
CA1 Level LO
CA1 Type
VIO 1 Dest
VIO 1 Source
Run/Stp Ctrl
AnIn1
16% (3.2mA/20mA x 100%)
12% (2.4mA/20mA x 100%)
Hysteresis
RunR
CA1
Remote
219
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Reference signal AnIn1
Max speed
20 mA
4 mA
CA1 Level HI = 16%
3.2 mA
CA1 Level LO = 12%
2.4 mA
t
CA1
Mode
RUN
STOP
T
1 2
4 5 6
3
Fig. 115
No.
1
2
3
T
4
5
6
Description
The reference signal passes the Level LO value from below (positive edge),
the comparator CA1 output stays low, mode=RUN.
The reference signal passes the Level HI value from below (positive edge),
the comparator CA1 output is set high, mode=RUN.
The reference signal passes the threshold level of 4 mA, the motor speed will
now follow the reference signal.
During this period the motor speed will follow the reference signal.
The reference signal reaches the threshold level, motor speed is 0 rpm, mode
= RUN.
The reference signal passes the Level HI value from above (negative edge),
the comparator CA1 output stays high, mode =RUN.
The reference signal passes the Level LO value from above (negative edge),
the comparator CA1 output=STOP.
Analogue Comparator 1 Level High [6112]
Selects the analogue comparator constant high level according to the
selected value in menu [6111].
The default value is 300.
6112 CA1 Level HI
Stp A
300rpm
Default:
Range:
300 rpm
See min/max in table below.
Mode
Process Val
Speed, rpm
Torque, %
220
Min
Max
Set by process settings [321] and [322]
0
Max speed
0
Max torque
Decimals
3
0
0
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Mode
Shaft Power, kW
El Power, kW
Current, A
Output volt, V
Frequency, Hz
DC voltage, V
Heatsink temp, C
PT 100_1_2_3, C
Energy, kWh
Run time, h
Mains time, h
AnIn 1-4%
Process Ref
Process Err
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-100
0
0
0
0
Max
Motor Pnx4
Motor Pnx4
Motor Inx4
1000
400
1250
100
300
1000000
65535
65535
100
Set by process settings [321] and [322]
Decimals
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
3
Note If bipolar is selected [6115] then Min value is equal to -Max in the table
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43402
170/51
4d4a
Long,
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via process
value
EInt
Example
This example describes the normal use of the constant level high and low.
Menu
343
6111
6112
6113
6114
561
562
Function
Max Speed
CA1 Value
CA1 Level HI
CA1 Level LO
CA1 Type
VC1 Dest
VC1 Source
Setting
1500
Speed
300 rpm
200 rpm
Hysteresis
Timer 1
CA1
221
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Max
Speed
[343]
CA1 Level HI [6112]
300
Hysteresis/Window
band
200
CA1 Level LO [6113]
t
Output CA1
[6114] Hysteresis
High
Low
Output CA1
[6114] Window
High
Low
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 116
Table 29 Comments to Fig. 43 regarding Hysteresis and Window selection
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
The reference signal passes the Level LO value from
below (positive edge)
The reference signal passes the Level HI value from
below (positive edge)
The reference signal passes the Level HI value from
above (negative edge)
The reference signal passes the Level LO value from
above (negative edge)
The reference signal passes the Level LO value from
below (positive edge)
The reference signal passes the Level HI value from
below (positive edge)
The reference signal passes the Level HI value from
above (negative edge).
The reference signal passes the Level LO value from
above (negative edge)
Hyster
Window
Off
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Analogue Comparator 1 Level Low [6113]
Selects the analogue comparator constant low level according to the selected
value in menu [6111].
For default value see selection table for menu [612].
6113 CA1 Level LO
Stp A
200rpm
Default:
Range:
222
200 rpm
Enter a value for the low level.
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43403
170/52
4d4b
Long,
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via process
value
EInt
Analogue Comparator 1 Type [6114]
Selects the analogue comparator constant low level according to the selected
value in menu [6111].
For default value see selection table for menu [612].
6114 CA1 Type
Stp A
Hysteresis
Default:
Hysteresis
Window
0
1
Hysteresis
Hysteresis type comparator
Window type comparator
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43481
170/130
4d99
UInt
UInt
Analogue Comparator 1 Polarity [6115]
Selects the analogue comparator constant low level according to the selected
value in menu [6111].
For default value see selection table for menu [612].
6115 CA1 Polar
Stp A
Unipolar
Default:
Unipolar
Bipolar
0
1
Unipolar
Absolute value of [6111] used
Signed value of [6111] used
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43486
170/135
4d9e
UInt
UInt
223
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Example
See next figure for different principle functionality of comparator features 6114
and 6115.
Type [6114] = Hysteresis
CA1
[6115] Unipolar
[6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO > 0
-HI
-LO
LO
HI
LO
HI
CA1
[6115] Bipolar
[6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO > 0
CA1
[6115] Bipolar
[6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO < 0
LO
HI
CA1
[6115] Bipolar
[6112] HI < 0
[6113] LO < 0
LO
HI
Fig. 117 Principle functionality of comparator features for “type[6115]=Hysteresis” and “Polar [6115]”.
Type [6114] = Window
CA1
[6115] Unipolar
[6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO > 0
-HI
-LO
LO
HI
LO
HI
CA1
[6115] Bipolar
[6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO > 0
CA1
[6115] Bipolar
[6112] HI > 0
[6113] LO < 0
LO
HI
CA1
[6115] Bipolar
[6112] HI < 0
[6113] LO < 0
LO
HI
Fig. 118 Principle functionality of comparator features for “type[6115]=Window” and “Polar [6115]”.
Note When “unipolar” is selected, absolute value of signal is used.
Note When “bipolar” is selected in [6115] then:
1. Functionality is not symmetrical
2. Ranges for high/low are bipolar
224
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
CA2 Setup [612]
Analog comparator 2, parameter group.
Analog comparator 2, Value [6121]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 value [6111].
6121 CA2 Value
Stp A
Torque
Default:
Selections:
Torque
Same as in menu [6111]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43404
170/53
4d4c
UInt
UInt
Analogue Comparator 2 Level High [6122]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level high [6112].
6122 CA2 Level HI
Stp A
20%
Default:
Range:
20%
Enter a value for the high level.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43405
170/54
4d4d
Long
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via process
value
EInt
Analogue Comparator 2 Level Low [6123]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low [6113].
6123 CA2 Level LO
Stp A
10%
Default:
Range:
10%
Enter a value for the low level.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
43406
170/55
4d4e
225
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Section 11-6
Long,
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via process
value
EInt
Analogue Comparator 2 Type [6124]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low [6114].
6124 CA2 Type
Stp A
Hysteresis
Default:
Hysteresis
Window
0
1
Hysteresis
Hysteresis type comparator
Window type comparator
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43482
170/131
4d9a
UInt
UInt
Analogue Comparator 2 Polarity [6125]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low [6115].
6125 CA1 Polar
Stp A
Unipolar
Default:
Unipolar
Bipolar
0
1
Unipolar
Absolute value of [6121] used
Signed value of [6121] used
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43487
170/136
4d9f
UInt
UInt
CA3 Setup [613]
Analog comparator 3, parameter group.
226
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Analog comparator 3, Value [6131]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 value [6111].
6131 CA3 Value
Stp A Process Val
Default:
Selections:
Process Value
Same as in menu [6111]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43471
170/120
4d8f
UInt
UInt
Analogue Comparator 3 Level High [6132]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level high [6112].
6132 CA3 Level HI
Stp A
300rpm
Default:
Range:
300rpm
Enter a value for the high level.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43472
170/121
4d90
Long
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via process
value
EInt
Analogue Comparator 3 Level Low [6133]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low [6113].
6133 CA3 Level LO
Stp A
200rpm
Default:
Range:
200rpm
Enter a value for the low level.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43473
170/122
4d91
Long,
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via process
value
EInt
227
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Analogue Comparator 3 Type [6134]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low [6114].
6134 CA3 Type
Stp A
Hysteresis
Default:
Hysteresis
Window
0
1
Hysteresis
Hysteresis type comparator
Window type comparator
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43483
170/132
4d9b
UInt
UInt
Analogue Comparator 3 Polarity [6135]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low [6115].
6135 CA3 Polar
Stp A
Unipolar
Default:
Unipolar
Bipolar
0
1
Unipolar
Absolute value of [6131] used
Signed value of [6131] used
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43488
170/137
4da0
UInt
UInt
CA4 Setup [614]
Analog comparator 4, parameter group.
Analog comparator 4, Value [6141]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 value [6111].
6141 CA4 Value
Stp A Process Err
Default:
Selections:
Process Error
Same as in menu [6111]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
228
43474
170/123
4d92
UInt
UInt
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Analogue Comparator 4 Level High [6142]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level high [6112].
6142 CA4 Level HI
Stp A
100rpm
Default:
Range:
100rpm
Enter a value for the high level.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43475
170/124
4d93
Long
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via process
value
EInt
Analogue Comparator 4 Level Low [6143]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low [6113].
6143 CA4 Level LO
Stp A
-100rpm
Default:
Range:
-100rpm
Enter a value for the low level.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43476
170/125
4d94
Long,
1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V,
0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 via process
value
EInt
Analogue Comparator 4 Type [6144]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low [6114].
6144 CA4 Type
Stp A
Hysteresis
Default:
Hysteresis
Window
0
1
Hysteresis
Hysteresis type comparator
Window type comparator
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43484
170/133
4d9c
UInt
UInt
229
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Analogue Comparator 4 Polarity [6145]
Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low [6115].
6145 CA4 Polar
Stp A
Unipolar
Default:
Unipolar
Bipolar
0
1
Unipolar
Absolute value of [6141] used
Signed value of [6141] used
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43489
170/138
4da1
UInt
UInt
Digital Comparator Setup [615]
Digital comparators, parameter group
Digital Comparator 1 [6151]
Selection of the input signal for digital comparator 1 (CD1).
The output signal CD1 becomes high if the selected input signal is active. See
Fig. 119.
The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs or used
as a source for the virtual connections [560].
+
Digital signal:
Menu [6151]
Signal: CD1
DComp 1
-
(NG_06-F126)
Fig. 119 Digital comparator
6151 CD1
Stp A
Default:
Selection:
Run
Same selections as for DigOut 1 [541].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
230
Run
43407
170/56
4d4f
UInt
UInt
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Digital Comparator 2 [6152]
Function is identical to digital comparator 1.
6152 CD 2
Stp A
DigIn 1
Default:
Selection:
DigIn 1
Same selections as for DigOut 1 [541].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43408
170/57
4d50
UInt
UInt
Digital Comparator 3 [6153]
Function is identical to digital comparator 1.
6153 CD 3
Stp A
DigIn 1
Default:
DigIn 1
Selection:
Same selections as for DigOut 1 [541].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43477
170/126
4d95
UInt
UInt
Digital Comparator 4 [6154]
Function is identical to digital comparator 1.
6154 CD 4
Stp A
DigIn 1
Default:
Selection:
DigIn 1
Same selections as for DigOut 1 [541].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43478
170/127
4d96
UInt
UInt
231
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
11-6-2 Logic Output Y [620]
By means of an expression editor, the comparator signals can be logically
combined into the Logic Y function.
The expression editor has the following features:
•
The following signals can be used:
CA1, CA2, CD1, CD2 or LZ (or LY)
•
The following signals can be inverted:
!A1, !A2, !D1, !D2, or !LZ (or !LY)
•
The following logical operators are available:
"+" : OR operator
"&" : AND operator
"^" : EXOR operator
Expressions according to the following truth table can be made:
Input
A
0
0
1
1
Result
B
0
1
0
1
& (AND)
0
0
0
1
^(EXOR)
+ (OR)
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs or used
as a Virtual Connection Source [560].
620 LOGIC Y
Stp
CA1&!A2&CD1
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31035
121/179
240b
Long
Text
The expression must be programmed by means of the menus [621] to [625].
232
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Example:
Broken belt detection for Logic Y
This example describes the programming for a so-called “broken belt detection” for fan applications.
The comparator CA1 is set for frequency>10Hz.
The comparator !A2 is set for load < 20%.
The comparator CD1 is set for Run.
The 3 comparators are all AND-ed, given the “broken belt detection”.
In menus [621]-[625] expression entered for Logic Y is visible.
Set menu [621] to CA1
Set menu [622] to &
Set menu [623] to !A2
Set menu [624] to &
Set menu [625] to CD1
Menu [620] now holds the expression for Logic Y:
CA1&!A2&CD1
which is to be read as:
(CA1&!A2)&CD1
Note Set menu [624] to "" to finish the expression when only two comparators are
required for Logic Y.
Y Comp 1 [621]
Selects the first comparator for the logic Y function.
621 Y Comp 1
Stp A
CA1
Default:
CA1
!A1
CA2
!A2
CD1
!D1
CD2
!D2
LZ/LY
!LZ/!LY
T1
!T1
T2
!T2
CA3
!A3
CA4
!A4
CD3
!D3
CD4
!D4
CA1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
233
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43411
170/60
4d53
UInt
UInt
Y Operator 1 [622]
Selects the first operator for the logic Y function.
622 Y Operator 1
Stp A
&
Default:
&
+
^
1
2
3
&
&=AND
+=OR
^=EXOR
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43412
170/61
4d54
UInt
UInt
Y Comp 2 [623]
Selects the second comparator for the logic Y function.
623 Y Comp 2
Stp A
!A2
Default:
Selection:
!A2
Same as menu [621]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43413
170/62
4d55
UInt
UInt
Y Operator 2 [624]
Selects the second operator for the logic Y function.
624 Y Operator 2
Stp A
&
Default:
234
.
0
&
1
&
When · (dot) is selected, the Logic Y expression is finished
(when only two expressions are tied together).
&=AND
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
+
^
Section 11-6
2
3
+=OR
^=EXOR
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43414
170/63
4d56
UInt
UInt
Y Comp 3 [625]
Selects the third comparator for the logic Y function.
625 Y Comp 3
Stp A
CD1
Default:
Selection:
CD1
Same as menu [621]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43415
170/64
4d57
UInt
UInt
11-6-3 Logic Output Z [630]
630 LOGIC Z
Stp A CA1&!A2&CD1
The expression must be programmed by means of the menus [631] to [635].
Z Comp 1 [631]
Selects the first comparator for the logic Z function.
631 Z Comp 1
Stp A
CA1
Default:
Selection:
CA1
Same as menu [621]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43421
170/70
4d5d
UInt
UInt
235
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Z Operator 1 [632]
Selects the first operator for the logic Z function.
632 Z Operator 1
Stp A
&
Default:
Selection:
&
Same as menu [622]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43422
170/71
4d5e
UInt
UInt
Z Comp 2 [633]
Selects the second comparator for the logic Z function.
633 Z Comp 2
Stp A
!A2
Default:
!A2
Selection:
Same as menu [621]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43423
170/72
4d5f
UInt
UInt
Z Operator 2 [634]
Selects the second operator for the logic Z function.
634 Z Operator 2
Stp A
&
Default:
Selection:
&
Same as menu [624]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
236
43424
170/73
4d60
UInt
UInt
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Z Comp 3 [635]
Selects the third comparator for the logic Z function.
635 Z Comp 3
Stp A
CD1
Default:
Selection:
CD1
Same as menu [621]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43425
170/74
4d61
UInt
UInt
11-6-4 Timer1 [640]
The Timer functions can be used as a delay timer or as an interval with separate On and Off times (alternate mode). In delay mode, the output signal T1Q
becomes high if the set delay time is expired. See Fig. 120.
Timer1 Trig
T1Q
Timer1 delay
Fig. 120
In alternate mode, the output signal T1Q will switch automatically from high to
low etc. according to the set interval times. See Fig. 121.
The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs used in
logic functions [620] and [630], or as a virtual connection source [560].
Note The actual timers are common for all parameter sets. If the actual set is
changed, the timer functionality [641] to [645] will change according set
settings but the timer value will stay unchanged. So initialization of the timer
might differ for a set change compared to normal triggering of a timer.
Timer1 Trig
T1Q
T1
T2
T1
T2
Fig. 121
237
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Timer 1 Trig [641]
641 Timer1 Trig
Stp A
Off
Default:
Selection:
Off
Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu [541].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43431
170/80
4d67
UInt
UInt
Timer 1 Mode [642]
642 Timer1 Mode
Stp A
Off
Default:
Off
Delay
Alternate
Off
0
1
2
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43432
170/81
4d68
UInt
UInt
Timer 1 Delay [643]
This menu is only visible when timer mode is set to delay.
This menu can only be edited as in alternative 2, see section 9-5, page 83.
Timer 1 delay sets the time that will be used by the first timer after it is activated. Timer 1 can be activated by a high signal on a DigIn that is set to Timer
1 or via a virtual destination [560].
643 Timer1Delay
Stp A
0:00:00
Default:
Range:
0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)
0:00:00–9:59:59
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:q
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
238
43433 hours
43434 minutes
43435 seconds
170/82, 170/83,
170/84
4d69 hours
4d6a minutes
4d6b seconds
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Section 11-6
UInt
UInt
Timer 1 T1 [644]
When timer mode is set to Alternate and Timer 1 is enabled, this timer will
automatically keep on switching according to the independently programmable up and down times. The Timer 1 in Alternate mode can be enabled by a
digital input or via a virtual connection. See Fig. 121. Timer 1 T1 sets the up
time in the alternate mode.
644 Timer 1 T1
Stp A
0:00:00
Default:
Range:
0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)
0:00:00–9:59:59
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43436 hours
43437 minutes
43438 seconds
170/85, 170/86,
170/87
4d6c hours
4d6d minutes
4d6e seconds
UInt
UInt
Timer 1 T2 [645]
Timer 1 T2 sets the down time in the alternate mode.
645 Timer1 T2
Stp A
0:00:00
Default:
Range:
0:00:00, hr:min:sec
0:00:00–9:59:59
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43439 hours
43440 minutes
43441 seconds
170/88, 170/89,
170/90
4d6f hours
4d70 minutes
4d71 seconds
UInt
UInt
Note Timer 1 T1 [644] and Timer 2 T1 [654] are only visible when Timer Mode is set
to Alternate.
239
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Timer 1 Value [649]
Timer 1 Value shows actual value of the timer.
649 Timer1 Value
Stp A
0:00:00
Default:
Range:
0:00:00, hr:min:sec
0:00:00–9:59:59
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
42921 hours
42922 minutes
42923 seconds
168/80, 168/81,
168/82
4b69 hours
4b6a minutes
4b6b seconds
UInt
UInt
11-6-5 Timer2 [650]
Refer to the descriptions for Timer1.
Timer 2 Trig [651]
651 Timer2 Trig
Stp A
Off
Default:
Selection:
Off
Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu [541].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43451
170/100
4d7b
UInt
UInt
Timer 2 Mode [652]
652 Timer2 Mode
Stp A
Off
Default:
Selection:
Off
Same as in menu [642]
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
240
43452
170/101
4d7c
UInt
UInt
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Section 11-6
Timer 2 Delay [653]
653 Timer2Delay
Stp A
0:00:00
Default:
Range:
0:00:00, hr:min:sec
0:00:00–9:59:59
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43453 hours
43454 minutes
43455 seconds
170/102, 170/103,
170/104
4d7d hours
4d7e minutes
4d7f seconds
UInt
UInt
Timer 2 T1 [654]
654 Timer 2 T1
Stp A
0:00:00
Default:
0:00:00, hr:min:sec
Range:
0:00:00–9:59:59
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
43456 hours
43457 minutes
43458 seconds
170/105, 170/106,
170/107
4d80 hours
4d81 minutes
4d82 seconds
UInt
UInt
Timer 2 T2 [655]
655 Timer 2 T2
Stp A
0:00:00
Default:
Range:
0:00:00, hr:min:sec
0:00:00–9:59:59
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
43459 hours
43460 minutes
43461 seconds
170/108, 170/109,
170/110
4d83 hours
4d84 minutes
4d85 seconds
241
Logical Functions and Timers [600]
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Section 11-6
UInt
UInt
Timer 2 Value [659]
Timer 2 Value shows actual value of the timer.
659 Timer2 Value
Stp A
0:00:00
Default:
Range:
0:00:00, hr:min:sec
0:00:00–9:59:59
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
242
42924 hours
42925 minutes
42926 seconds
168/83, 168/84,
168/85
4b6c hours
4b6d minutes
4b6f seconds
UInt
UInt
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
11-7 View Operation/Status [700]
Menu with parameters for viewing all actual operational data, such as speed,
torque, power, etc.
11-7-1 Operation [710]
Process Value [711]
The process value is a display function which can be programmed according
to several quantities and units related to the reference value.
711 Process Val
Stp
Unit
Resolution
Depends on selected process source, [321].
Speed: 1 rpm, 4 digits
Other units: 3 digits
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31001
121/145
23e9
Long, 1=0.001
EInt
Speed [712]
Displays the actual shaft speed.
712 Speed
Stp
Unit:
Resolution:
rpm
rpm
1 rpm, 4 digits
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31002
121/146
23ea
Int, 1=1 rpm
Int, 1=1 rpm
Torque [713]
Displays the actual shaft torque.
713 Torque
Stp
0% 0.0Nm
Unit:
Resolution:
Nm
1 Nm
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
31003 Nm
31004%
Profibus slot/index
121/147
243
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
23eb Nm
23ec %
Long, 1=1%
EInt
Shaft power [714]
Displays the actual shaft power.
714 Shaft Power
Stp
W
Unit:
Resolution:
W
1W
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31005
121/149
23ed
Long, 1=1W
EInt
Electrical Power [715]
Displays the actual electrical output power.
715 El Power
Stp
Unit:
Resolution:
kW
kW
1W
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31006
121/150
23ee
Long, 1=1W
EInt
Current [716]
Displays the actual output current.
716 Current
Stp
Unit:
Resolution:
A
0.1 A
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
244
31007
121/151
23ef
Long, 1=0.1 A
EInt
A
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
Output Voltage [717]
Displays the actual output voltage.
717 Output Volt
Stp
V
Unit:
Resolution:
V
1V
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31008
121/152
23f0
Long, 1=0.1 V
EInt
Frequency [718]
Displays the actual output frequency.
718 Frequency
Stp
Unit:
Hz
Resolution:
0.1 Hz
Hz
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31009
121/153
23f1
Long, 1=0.1 Hz
EInt
DC Link Voltage [719]
Displays the actual DC link voltage.
719 DC Voltage
Stp
V
Unit:
Resolution:
V
1V
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31010
121/154
23f2
Long, 1=0.1 V
EInt
245
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
Heatsink Temperature [71A]
Displays the actual heatsink temperature.
71A Heatsink Tmp
Stp
C
Unit:
Resolution:
°C
0.1°C
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31011
121/155
23f3
Long, 1=0.1C
EInt
PT100_1_2_3 Temp [71B]
Displays the actual PT100 temperature.
71B PT100 1,2,3
Stp
Unit:
°C
Resolution:
1°C
C
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31012, 31013, 31014
121/156, 121/157, 121/158
23f4, 23f5, 23f6
Long, 1=1ºC
EInt
11-7-2 Status [720]
VSD Status [721]
Indicates the overall status of the variable speed drive.
721 VSD Status
Stp 1/222/333/44
Fig. 122 VSD status
Display position
246
Status
1
Parameter Set
222
Source of reference
value
Value
A,B,C,D
-Key (keyboard)
-Rem (remote)
-Com (Serial comm.)
-Opt (option)
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
Display position
Status
Value
333
Source of Run/Stop/
Reset command
44
Limit functions
-Key (keyboard)
-Rem (remote)
-Com (Serial comm.)
-Opt (option)
-TL (Torque Limit)
-SL (Speed Limit)
-CL (Current Limit)
-VL (Voltage Limit)
- - - -No limit active
Example: “A/Key/Rem/TL”
This means:
A: Parameter Set A is active.
Key: Reference value comes from the keyboard (CP).
Rem: Run/Stop commands come from terminals 1-22.
TL: Torque Limit active.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31015
121/159
23f7
UInt
UInt
Description of communication format
Integer values and bits used
Bit
1-0
4-2
Integer representation
Active Parameter set, where 0=A, 1=B, 2=C, 3=D
Source of Reference control value, where 0=Rem, 1=Key, 2=Com, 3=Option
Source of Run/Stop/Reset command, where 0=Rem, 1=Key, 2=Com,
3=Option
Active limit functions, where 0=No limit, 1=VL, 2=SL, 3=CL, 4=TL
7-5
15-8
Example: Previous example “A/Key/Rem/TL”
In bit format this is presented as:
Bit no.
15
14 13 12
MSB
0
0
0
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TL (4)
Limit functions
Rem (0)
Key (1)
A (0)
ParaSource of Source of
meter
command control
set
Warning [722]
Display the actual or last warning condition. A warning occurs if the VSD is
close to a trip condition but still in operation. During a warning condition the
red trip LED will start to blink as long as the warning is active.
722
Stp
Warnings
warn.msg
247
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
The active warning message is displayed in menu [722].
If no warning is active the message “No Warning” is displayed.
The following warnings are possible:
Fieldbus integer value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Warning message
No Error
Motor I²t
PTC
Motor lost
Locked rotor
Ext trip
Mon MaxAlarm
Mon MinAlarm
Comm error
PT100
Pump
Ext Mot Temp
LC Level
Brake
Option
Over temp
Over curr F
Over volt D
Over volt G
Over volt M
Over speed
Under voltage
Power fault
Desat
DClink error
Int error
Ovolt m cut
Over voltage
Not used
Not used
Not used
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31016
121/160
23f8
Long
UInt
See also the Chapter SECTION 12 page 259.
Digital Input Status [723]
Indicates the status of the digital inputs. See Fig. 123.
1: DigIn 1
2: DigIn 2
3: DigIn 3
4: DigIn 4
248
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
5: DigIn 5
6: DigIn 6
7: DigIn 7
8: DigIn 8
The positions one to eight (read from left to right) indicate the status of the
associated input:
1: High
0: Low
The example in Fig. 123 indicates that DigIn 1,
DigIn 3 and DigIn 6 are active at this moment.
723 DigIn Status
Stp
1010 0100
Fig. 123 Digital input status example
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31017
121/161
23f9
UInt, bit 0=DigIn1, bit 8=DigIn8
Digital Output Status [724]
Indicates the status of the digital outputs and relays. See Fig. 124.
RE indicate the status of the relays on position:
1: Relay1
2: Relay2
3: Relay3
DO indicate the status of the digital outputs on position:
1: DigOut1
2: DigOut2
The status of the associated output is shown.
1: High
0: Low
The example in Fig. 124 indicates that DigOut1 is active and Digital Out 2 is
not active. Relay 1 is active, relay 2 and 3 are not active.
724 DigOutStatus
Stp RE 100 DO 10
Fig. 124 Digital output status example
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
31018
121/162
23fa
249
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
UInt, bit 0=DigOut1,
bit 1=DigOut2
bit 8=Relay1
bit 9=Relay2
bit 10=Relay3
Analogue Input Status [725]
Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2.
725 AnIn 1
Stp
-100%
2
65%
Fig. 125 Analogue input status
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31019, 31020
121/163, 121/164
23fb, 23fc
Long, 1=1%
EInt
The first row indicates the analogue inputs.
1: AnIn 1
2: AnIn 2
Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the status of the
belonging input is shown in %:
-100% AnIn1 has a negative 100% input value
65% AnIn2 has a 65% input value
So the example in Fig. 125 indicates that both the Analogue inputs are active.
Note The shown percentages are absolute values based on the full range/scale of
the in- our output; so related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA.
Analogue Input Status [726]
Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 3 and 4.
726 AnIn 3
Stp
-100%
4
65%
Fig. 126 Analogue input status
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
250
31021, 31022
121/165, 121/166
23fd, 23fe
Long, 1=1%
EInt
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
Analogue Output Status [727]
Indicates the status of the analogue outputs. Fig. 127. E.g. if 4-20 mA output
is used, the value 20% equals to 4 mA.
727 AnOut 1
Stp
-100%
2
65%
Fig. 127 Analogue output status
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31023, 31024
121/167, 121/168
23ff, 2400
Long, 1=1%
EInt
The first row indicates the Analogue outputs.
1: AnOut 1
2: AnOut 2
Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the status of the
belonging output is shown in %:
-100% AnOut1 has a negative 100% output value
65% AnOut1 has a 65% output value
The example in Fig. 127 indicates that both the Analogue outputs are active.
Note The shown percentages are absolute values based on the full range/scale of
the in- our output; so related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA.
I/O board Status [728] - [72A]
Indicates the status for the additional I/O on option boards 1 (B1), 2 (B2) and
3 (B3).
728 IO B1
Stp
RE000 DI10
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31025 - 31027
121/170 - 172
2401-2403
UInt, bit 0=DigIn1
bit 1=DigIn2
bit 2=DigIn3
bit 8=Relay1
bit 9=Relay2
bit 10=Relay3
11-7-3 Stored values [730]
The shown values are the actual values built up over time. Values are stored
at power down and updated again at power up.
251
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
Run Time [731]
Displays the total time that the VSD has been in the Run Mode.
731 Run Time
Stp
h:mm:ss
Unit:
Range:
h: m: s (hours: minutes: seconds)
0h: 0m: 0s–262143h: 59m: 59s
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31028 hours
31029 minutes
31030 seconds
121/172
121/173
121/174
2404, 2405, 2406
UInt, 1=1h/m/s
UInt, 1=1h/m/s
Reset Run Time [7311]
Reset the run time counter. The stored information will be erased and a new
registration period will start.
7311 Reset RunTm
Stp
No
Default:
No
Yes
No
0
1
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
7
0/6
2007
UInt
UInt
Note After reset the setting automatically reverts to “No”.
Mains time [732]
Displays the total time that the VSD has been connected to the mains supply.
This timer cannot be reset.
732 Mains Time
Stp
h:m:s
Unit:
Range:
252
h: m: s (hours: minutes: seconds)
0h: 0m: 0s–262143h: 59m: 59s
View Operation/Status [700]
Section 11-7
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31031 hours
31032 minutes
31033 seconds
121/175
121/176
121/177
2407, 2408, 2409
UInt, 1=1h/m/s
UInt, 1=1h/m/s
Note At 65535 h: 59 m the counter stops. It will not revert to 0h: 0m.
Energy [733]
Displays the total energy consumption since the last energy reset [7331] took
place.
733 Energy
Stp
Unit:
Range:
kWh
kWh
0.0–999999kWh
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31034
121/178
240a
Long, 1=1 W
EInt
Reset Energy [7331]
Resets the kWh counter. The stored information will be erased and a new registration period will start.
7331 Rst Energy
Stp
No
Default:
Selection:
No
No, Yes
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
6
0/5
2006
UInt
UInt
Note After reset the setting automatically goes back to “No”.
253
View Trip Log [800]
Section 11-8
11-8 View Trip Log [800]
Main menu with parameters for viewing all the logged trip data. In total the
VSD saves the last 10 trips in the trip memory. The trip memory refreshes on
the FIFO principle (First In, First Out). Every trip in the memory is logged on
the time of the Run Time [731] counter. At every trip, the actual values of several parameter are stored and available for troubleshooting.
11-8-1 Trip Message log [810]
Display the cause of the trip and what time that it occurred. When a trip occurs
the status menus are copied to the trip message log. There are nine trip message logs [810]–[890]. When the tenth trip occurs the oldest trip will disappear.
After reset of occurred trip, the trip message will be removed and menu [100]
will be indicated.
8x0 Trip message
Stp
h:mm:ss
Unit:
Range:
h: m (hours: minutes)
0h: 0m–65355h: 59m
810 Ext Trip
Stp
132:12:14
For fieldbus integer value of trip message, see message table for warnings,
[722].
Note Bits 0–5 used for trip message value. Bits 6–15 for internal use.
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31101
121/245
244d
UInt
UInt
Trip message [811]-[81O]
The information from the status menus are copied to the trip message log
when a trip occurs.
Trip menu
254
Copied
from
Description
811
711
Process Value
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
81A
81B
81C
712
712
714
715
716
717
718
719
71A
71B
721
Speed
Torque
Shaft Power
Electrical Power
Current
Output voltage
Frequency
DC Link voltage
Heatsink Temperature
PT100_1, 2, 3
VSD Status
View Trip Log [800]
Section 11-8
Trip menu
81D
81E
81F
81G
81H
81I
81J
81K
81L
81M
81N
81O
Copied
from
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
72A
731
732
733
310
Description
Digital input status
Digital output status
Analogue input status 1-2
Analogue input status 3-4
Analogue output status 1-2
I/O status option board 1
I/O status option board 2
I/O status option board 3
Run Time
Mains Time
Energy
Process reference
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31102 - 31135
121/246 - 254,
122/0 - 24
244e-246f
Depends on parameter, see respective parameter.
Depends on parameter, see respective parameter.
Example:
Fig. 128 shows the third trip memory menu [830]: Over temperature trip
occurred after 1396 hours and 13 minutes in Run time.
830 Over temp
Stp
1396h:13m
Fig. 128 Trip 3
11-8-2 Trip Messages [820] - [890]
Same information as for menu [810].
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
31151–31185
31201–31235
31251–31285
31301–31335
31351–31385
31401–31435
31451–31485
31501–31535
122/40–122/74
122/90–122/124
122/140–122/174
122/190–122/224
122/240–123/18
123/35 - 123/68
123/85–123/118
123/135–123/168
Trip log list
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Trip log list
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
255
View Trip Log [800]
Section 11-8
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
Trip log list
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Depends on parameter, see respective parameter.
Depends on parameter, see respective parameter.
247e-24b0
24b1-24e2
24e3-2514
2515-2546
2547-2578
2579-25aa
25ab-25dc
25dd-260e
All nine alarm lists contain the same type of data. For example DeviceNet
parameter 31101 in alarm list 1 contains the same data information as 31151
in alarm list 2. It is possible to read all parameters in alarm lists 2–9 by recalculating the DeviceNet instance number into a Profibus slot/index number.
This is done in the following way:
slot no = abs((dev instance no-1)/255)
index no = (dev instance no-1) modulo 255
dev instance no = slot nox255+index no+1
Example: We want to read out the process value out from alarm list 9. In
alarm list 1 process value has the DeviceNet instance number 31102. In
alarm list 9 it has DeviceNet instance no 31502 (see table 2 above). The corresponding slot/index no is then:
slot no = abs((31502-1)/255)=123
index no (modulo)= the remainder of the division above = 136, calculated as:
(31502-1)-123x255=136
11-8-3 Reset Trip Log [8A0]
Resets the content of the 10 trip memories.
8A0 Reset Trip
Stp
No
Default:
No
Yes
No
0
1
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
8
0/7
2008
UInt
UInt
Note After the reset the setting goes automatically back to “NO”. The message
“OK” is displayed for 2 sec.
256
System Data [900]
Section 11-9
11-9 System Data [900]
Main menu for viewing all the VSD system data.
11-9-1 VSD Data [920]
VSD Type [921]
Shows the VSD type according to the type number.
The options are indicated on the type plate of the VSD.
Note If the control board is not configured, then type type shown is SX-D6160-EV
921
Stp
SX-V 2.0
SX-D6160-EV
Example of type
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31037
121/181
240d
Long
Text
Examples:
SX-D6160-EVVSD-series suited for 690 volt mains supply, and a rated output
current in normal duty of 175 A.
Software [922]
Shows the software version number of the VSD.
Fig. 129 gives an example of the version number.
922 Software
Stp
V 4.30
Fig. 129 Example of software version
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
31038 software version
31039 option version
121/182-183
240e software version
240f option version
UInt
UInt
Table 30 Information for Modbus and Profibus number, software version
Bit
7–0
Description
minor
257
System Data [900]
Section 11-9
Table 30 Information for Modbus and Profibus number, software version
Bit
13–8
Description
major
release
00: V, release version
01: P, pre-release version
10: , Beta version
11: , Alpha version
15–14
Table 31 Information for Modbus and Profibus number, option version
Bit
7–0
15–8
Description
minor
major
V 4.30 = Version of the Software
Note It is important that the software version displayed in menu [920] is the same
software version number as the software version number written on the title
page of this instruction manual. If not, the functionality as described in this
manual may differ from the functionality of the VSD.
Unit name [923]
Option to enter a name of the unit for service use or customer identity. The
function enables the user to define a name with 12 symbols. Use the Prev and
Next key to move the cursor to the required position. Then use the + and keys to scroll in the character list. Confirm the character by moving the cursor
to the next position by pressing the Next key. See section User-defined Unit
[323].
Example
Create user name USER 15.
1. When in the menu [923] press Next to move the cursor to the right most
position.
2. Press the + key until the character U is displayed.
3. Press Next.
4. Then press the + key until S is displayed and confirm with Next.
5. Repeat until you have entered USER15.
923 Unit Name
Stp
Default:
No characters shown
Communication information
Modbus Instance no/
DeviceNet no:
Profibus slot/index
EtherCAT index (hex)
Fieldbus format
Modbus format
42301–42312
165/225–236
48fd-4908
UInt
UInt
When sending a unit name you send one character at a time starting at the
right most position.
258
SECTION 12
Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance
12-1 Trips, warnings and limits
In order to protect the variable speed drive the principal operating variables
are continuously monitored by the system. If one of these variables exceeds
the safety limit an error/warning message is displayed. In order to avoid any
possibly dangerous situations, the inverter sets itself into a stop Mode called
Trip and the cause of the trip is shown in the display.
Trips will always stop the VSD. Trips can be divided into normal and soft trips,
depending on the setup Trip Type, see menu [250] Autoreset. Normal trips are
default. For normal trips the VSD stops immediately, i.e. the motor coasts naturally to a standstill. For soft trips the VSD stops by ramping down the speed,
i.e. the motor decelerates to a standstill.
“Normal Trip”
•
The VSD stops immediately, the motor coasts to naturally to a standstill.
•
The Trip relay or output is active (if selected).
•
The Trip LED is on.
•
The accompanying trip message is displayed.
•
The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of the display).
•
After reset command, the trip message will disappear and menu [100] will
be indicated.
“Soft Trip”
•
The VSD stops by decelerating to a standstill.
During the deceleration.
•
The accompanying trip message is displayed, including an additional soft
trip indicator “S” before the trip time.
•
The Trip LED is blinking.
•
The Warning relay or output is active (if selected).
After standstill is reached.
•
The Trip LED is on.
•
The Trip relay or output is active (if selected).
•
The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of the display).
•
After reset command, the trip message will disappear and menu [100] will
be indicated.
Apart from the TRIP indicators there are two more indicators to show that the
inverter is in an “abnormal” situation.
“Warning”
•
The inverter is close to a trip limit.
•
The Warning relay or output is active (if selected).
•
The Trip LED is blinking.
•
The accompanying warning message is displayed in window [722] Warning.
•
One of the warning indications is displayed (area F of the display).
259
Trips, warnings and limits
Section 12-1
“Limits”
•
The inverter is limiting torque and/or frequency to avoid a trip.
•
The Limit relay or output is active (if selected).
•
The Trip LED is blinking.
•
One of the Limit status indications is displayed (area D of the display).
Table 32 List of trips and warnings
Trip/Warning
messages
Motor I2t
PTC
Motor PTC
PT100
Motor lost
Locked rotor
Ext trip
Ext Mot Temp
Mon MaxAlarm
Mon MinAlarm
Comm error
Pump
Over temp
Over curr F
Over volt D
Over volt G
Over volt
Under voltage
LC Level
Trip
(Normal/Soft)
Warning
indicators
(Area D)
I2t
Trip/Off/Limit
Trip/Off
On
Trip/Off
Trip/Off
Trip/Off
Via DigIn
Via DigIn
Trip/Off/Warn
Trip/Off/Warn
Trip/Off/Warn
Via Option
On
On
On
On
On
On
Trip/Off/Warm/
Via DigIn
Normal/Soft
Normal/Soft
Normal
Normal/Soft
Normal
Normal
Normal/Soft
Normal/Soft
Normal/Soft
Normal/Soft
Normal/Soft
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
LV
Normal/soft
LCL
Power Fault
PF #### *
Desat ### *
DClink error
Ovolt m cut
On
Normal
On
On
On
Normal
Normal
Normal
Over voltage
Safe stop
Brake
OPTION
Warning
Warning
Trip/Off/Warn
On
•
260
Selections
OT
VL
SST
Normal
Normal
Refer to table 28 regarding which Desat or Power Fault is triggered.
Trip conditions, causes and remedial action
Section 12-2
12-2 Trip conditions, causes and remedial action
The table later on in this section must be seen as a basic aid to find the cause
of a system failure and to how to solve any problems that arise. A variable
speed drive is mostly just a small part of a complete VSD system. Sometimes
it is difficult to determine the cause of the failure, although the variable speed
drive gives a certain trip message it is not always easy to find the right cause
of the failure. Good knowledge of the complete drive system is therefore necessary. Contact your supplier if you have any questions.
The VSD is designed in such a way that it tries to avoid trips by limiting torque,
overvolt etc.
Failures occurring during commissioning or shortly after commissioning are
most likely to be caused by incorrect settings or even bad connections.
Failures or problems occurring after a reasonable period of failure-free operation can be caused by changes in the system or in its environment (e.g. wear).
Failures that occur regularly for no obvious reasons are generally caused by
Electro Magnetic Interference. Be sure that the installation fulfils the demands
for installation stipulated in the EMC directives. See chapter EMC.
Sometimes the so-called “Trial and error” method is a quicker way to determine the cause of the failure. This can be done at any level, from changing
settings and functions to disconnecting single control cables or replacing
entire drives.
The Trip Log can be useful for determining whether certain trips occur at certain moments. The Trip Log also records the time of the trip in relation to the
run time counter.
!Warning If it is necessary to open the VSD or any part of the system (motor cable
housing, conduits, electrical panels, cabinets, etc.) to inspect or take
measure-ments as suggested in this instruction manual, it is absolutely
necessary to read and follow the safety instructions in the manual.
12-2-1 Technically qualified personnel
Installation, commissioning, demounting, making measurements, etc., of or at
the variable speed drive may only be carried out by personnel technically
qualified for the task.
12-2-2 Opening the variable speed drive
!Warning Always switch the mains voltage off if it is necessary to open the VSD and
wait at least 7 minutes to allow the capacitors to discharge.
!Warning In case of malfunctioning always check the DC-link voltage, or wait one hour
after the mains voltage has been switched off, before dismantling the VSD for
repair.
The connections for the control signals and the switches are isolated from the
mains voltage. Always take adequate precautions before opening the variable
speed drive.
12-2-3 Precautions to take with a connected motor
If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the driven machine,
the mains voltage must always first be disconnected from the variable speed
drive. Wait at least 7 minutes before continuing.
261
Trip conditions, causes and remedial action
Section 12-2
12-2-4 Autoreset Trip
If the maximum number of Trips during Autoreset has been reached, the trip
message hour counter is marked with an “A”.
830 OVERVOLT G
Trp A 345:45:12
Fig. 130 Autoreset trip
Fig. 130 shows the 3rd trip memory menu [830]: Overvoltage G trip after the
maximum Autoreset attempts took place after 345 hours, 45 minutes and 12
seconds of run time.
Table 33 Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial action
Trip condition
Motor I2t
“I2t”
Possible Cause
I2t value is exceeded.
-Overload on the motor according to the
programmed I2t settings.
Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum level.
PTC
Note Only valid if option board PTC/
PT100 is used.
Motor PTC
Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum level.
Note Only valid if [237] is enabled.
Motor PT100 elements exceeds maximum level.
PT100
Note Only valid if option board PTC/
PT100 is used.
Motor lost
Locked rotor
Ext trip
Ext Mot Temp
Mon MaxAlarm
Mon MinAlarm
Comm error
262
Remedy
-Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the
machinery (bearings, gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
-Change the Motor I2t Current setting in menu group
[230]
-Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the
machinery (bearings, gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
-Check the motor cooling system.
-Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high load.
-Set PTC, menu [234] to OFF
-Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the
machinery (bearings, gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
-Check the motor cooling system.
-Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high load.
-Set PTC, menu [237] to OFF
-Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the
machinery (bearings, gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.)
-Check the motor cooling system.
-Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high load.
-Set PT100 to OFF
-Check the motor voltage on all phases.
Phase loss or too great imbalance on the -Check for loose or poor motor cable connections
motor phases
-If all connections are OK, contact your supplier
-Set motor lost alarm to OFF.
-Check for mechanical problems at the motor or the
Torque limit at motor standstill:
machinery connected to the motor
-Mechanical blocking of the rotor.
-Set locked rotor alarm to OFF.
External input (DigIn 1-8) active:
-Check the equipment that initiates the external input
- active low function on the input.
-Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn 1-8
External input (DigIn 1-8) active:
-Check the equipment that initiates the external input
- active low function on the input.
-Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn 1-8
Max alarm level (overload) has been
-Check the load condition of the machine
reached.
-Check the monitor setting in section 11-6, page 217.
Min alarm level (underload) has been
-Check the load condition of the machine
reached.
-Check the monitor setting in section 11-6, page 217.
-Check cables and connection of the serial communication.
-Check all settings with regard to the serial communiError on serial communication (option)
cation
-Restart the equipment including the VSD
Trip conditions, causes and remedial action
Section 12-2
Table 33 Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial action
Trip condition
Possible Cause
No master pump can be selected due to
error in feedback signalling.
Remedy
Note Only used in Pump Control.
-Check cables and wiring for Pump feedback signals
-Check settings with regard to the pump feedback
digital inputs
Over temp
Heatsink temperature too high:
-Too high ambient temperature of the
VSD
-Insufficient cooling
-Too high current
-Blocked or stuffed fans
-Check the cooling of the VSD cabinet.
-Check the functionality of the built-in fans. The fans
must switch on automatically if the heatsink temperature gets too high. At power up the fans are briefly
switched on.
-Check VSD and motor rating
-Clean fans
Over curr F
Motor current exceeds the peak VSD current:
-Too short acceleration time.
-Too high motor load
-Excessive load change
-Soft short-circuit between phases or
phase to earth
-Poor or loose motor cable connections
-Too high IxR Compensation level
-Check the acceleration time settings and make them
longer if necessary.
-Check the motor load.
-Check on bad motor cable connections
-Check on bad earth cable connection
-Check on water or moisture in the motor housing and
cable connections.
-Lower the level of IxR Compensation [352]
Too high DC Link voltage:
-Too short deceleration time with
respect to motor/machine inertia.
-Too small brake resistor malfunctioning
Brake chopper
-Check the deceleration time settings and make them
longer if necessary.
-Check the dimensions of the brake resistor and the
functionality of the Brake chopper (if used)
Pump
Over volt D(eceleration)
Over volt G(eneration)
Over volt (Mains)
O(ver) volt M(ains)
cut
-Check the main supply voltage
Too high DC Link voltage, due to too high
-Try to take away the interference cause or use other
mains voltage
main supply lines.
Under voltage
Too low DC Link voltage:
-Too low or no supply voltage
-Mains voltage dip due to starting other
major power consuming machines on
the same line.
LC Level
Low liquid cooling level in external reservoir. External input (DigIn 1-8) active:
- active low function on the input.
Note Only valid for VSD types with
OPTION
Desat
Desat U+ *
Desat U- *
Desat V+ *
Desat V- *
Desat W+ *
Desat W- *
Desat BCC *
DC link error
Liquid Cooling option.
If and Option specific proble occurs
-Make sure all three phases are properly connected
and that the terminal screws are tightened.
-Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limits of the VSD.
-Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by
other machinery
-Use the function low voltage override [421]
-Check liquid cooling
-Check the equipment and wiring that initiates the
external input
-Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn 1-8
Check the description of the specific option
-Check on bad motor cable connections
-Check on bad earth cable connections
Failure in output stage,
-Check on water and moisture in the motor housing
-desaturation of IGBTs
and cable connections
-Hard short circuit between phases or
-Check that the rating plate data of the motor is corphase to earth
rectly entered.
-Earth fault
-Check the brake resistor, brake IGBT and wiring
-Brake IGBT (up to SX-D4037)
-For size G and up, check the cables from the PEBs to
the motor, that all are in correct order in parallel connection.
-Make sure all three phases are properly connected
and that the terminal screws are tightened.
DC link voltage ripple exceeds maximum -Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limlevel
its of the VSD.
-Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by
other machinery.
263
Maintenance
Section 12-3
Table 33 Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial action
Trip condition
Power Fault
PF Fan Err *
PF HCB Err *
PF Curr Err *
PF Overvolt *
PF Comm Err *
PF Int Temp *
PF Temp Err *
PF DC Err *
PF Sup Err *
Brake
Possible Cause
Remedy
One of the 10 PF (Power fault) trips below
-Check the PF errors and try to determine the cause.
has occurred, but could not be deterThe trip history could be helpful.
mined.
-Check for clogged air inlet filters in panel door and
Error in fan module
blocking material in fan module.(SX-D4045 or UP)
Error in controlled rectifier error (HCB)
-Check mains supply voltage (SX-D4030 or UP)
-Check motor.
Error in current balancing:
-Check fuses and line connections
-between different modules
-Check the individual motor current leads with a clamp
-between two phases within one module..
on amp meter.
-Check motor.
Error in voltage balancing, overvoltage
detected in one of the power modules
-Check fuses and line connections.
Internal communication error
Contact service
Internal temperature too high
Check internal fans
Malfunction in temperature sensor
Contact service
-Check mains supply voltage
DC-link error and mains supply fault
-Check fuses and line connections.
-Check mains supply voltage
Mains supply fault
-Check fuses and line connections.
-Check Brake acknowledge signal wiring to selected
digital input.
-Check programming of digital input DigIn 1-8, [520].
-Check circuit breaker feeding mechanical brake cirBrake tripped on brake fault (not released cuit.
)or Brake not engaged during stop.
-Check mechanical brake if acknowledge signal is
wired from brake limit switch.
-Check brake contactor.
-Check settings [33C], [33D], [33E], [33F]
* = 2...6 Module number if parallel power units (size 300–1500 A)
12-3 Maintenance
The variable speed drive is designed not to require any servicing or maintenance. There are however some things which must be checked regularly.
All variable speed drives have built-in fan which is speed controlled using
heatsink temperature feedback. This means that the fans are only running if
the VSD is running and loaded. The design of the heatsinks is such that the
fan does not blow the cooling air through the interior of the VSD, but only
across the outer surface of the heatsink. However, running fans will always
attract dust. Depending on the environment the fan and the heatsink will collect dust. Check this and clean the heatsink and the fans when necessary.
If variable speed drives are built into cabinets, also check and clean the dust
filters of the cabinets regularly.
Check external wiring, connections and control signals. Tighten terminal
screws if necessary.
264
SECTION 13
Options
The standard options available are described here briefly. Some of the options
have their own instruction or installation manual. For more information please
contact your supplier.
13-1 Options for the control panel
Order number
01-3957-00
01-3957-01
Description
Panel kit complete including panel
Panel kit complete including blank panel
Mounting cassette, blank panel and straight RS232-cable are available as
options for the control panel. These options may be useful, for example for
mounting a control panel in a cabinet door.
Fig. 131Control panel in mounting cassette
13-2 CX-Drive software
The optional software that runs on a personal computer can be used to load
parameter settings from the VSD to the PC for backup and printing. Recording
can be made in oscilloscope mode. Please contact OMRON sales for further
information.
265
Brake chopper
Section 13-3
13-3 Brake chopper
All VSD sizes can be fitted with an optional built-in brake chopper. The brake
resistor must be mounted outside the VSD. The choice of the resistor
depends on the application switch-on duration and duty-cycle. This option can
not be after mounted.
!Warning The table gives the minimum values of the brake resistors. Do not use
resistors lower than this value. The VSD can trip or even be damaged due to
high braking currents.
The following formula can be used to define the power of the connected brake
resistor:
Presistor =
(Brake level VDC)2
x ED%
Rmin
Where:
Presistor
required power of brake
resistor
Brake level VDC DC brake voltage level (see Table 34)
Rmin
minimum allowable brake resistor
(see Table 35 and Table 36)
ED%
effective braking period. Defined as:
ED% =
Active brake time at
nominal braking
power [s]
120 [s]
Maximum value of
1= continuous braking
Table 34 Brake Voltage levels
Supply voltage (VAC)
(set in menu [21B]
Brake level (VDC)
220–240
380–415
440–480
500–525
550–600
660–690
380
660
780
860
1000
1150
Table 35 Brake resistor SX 400V type
Type
SX-D40P7-EV
SX-D41P5-EV
SX-D42P2-EV
SX-D43P0-EV
SX-D44P0-EV
SX-D45P5-EV
SX-D47P5-EV
SX-D4011-EV
SX-D4015-EV
SX-D4018-EV
SX-D4022-EV
266
Rmin [ohm] if supply 380– Rmin [ohm] if supply 440–
480 VAC
415 VAC
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
26
26
17
17
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
30
30
20
20
Brake chopper
Section 13-3
Table 35 Brake resistor SX 400V type
Type
SX-D4030-EV
SX-D4037-EV
SX-D4045-EV
SX-D4055-EV
SX-D4075-EV
SX-D4090-EV
SX-D4110-EV
SX-D4132-EV
SX-@4160-EV
SX-@4200-EV
SX-@4220-EV
SX-@4250-EV
SX-@4315-EV
SX-@4355-EV
SX-@4400-EV
SX-@4450-EV
SX-@4500-EV
SX-@4630-EV
SX-@4800-EV
Rmin [ohm] if supply 380– Rmin [ohm] if supply 440–
415 VAC
480 VAC
10
10
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
2.7
2.7
2 x 3.8
2 x 3.8
2 x 2.7
2 x 2.7
3 x 2.7
3 x 2.7
3 x 2.7
4 x 2.7
4 x 2.7
6 x 2.7
6 x 2.7
12
12
4.4
4.4
4.4
4.4
3.1
3.1
2 x 4.4
2 x 4.4
2 x 3.1
2 x 3.1
3 x 3.1
3 x 3.1
3 x 3.1
4 x 3.1
4 x 3.1
6 x 3.1
6 x 3.1
Although the VSD will detect a failure in the brake electronics, the use of resistors with a thermal overload which will cut off the power at overload is strongly
recommended.
Table 36 Brake resistors SX 690V types
Type
Rmin [ohm]
Rmin [ohm]
Rmin [ohm]
if supply 500–525 if supply 550–600 if supply 660–690
VAC
VAC
VAC
SX-D6090-EV
SX-D6110-EV
SX-D6132-EV
SX-D6160-EV
SX-@6200-EV
SX-@6250-EV
4.9
4.9
4.9
4.9
2 x 4.9
2 x 4.9
5.7
5.7
5.7
5.7
2 x 5.7
2 x 5.7
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
2 x 6.5
2 x 6.5
SX-@6315-EV
SX-@6355-EV
SX-@6450-EV
SX-@6500-EV
SX-@6600-EV
SX-@6630-EV
SX-@6710-EV
SX-@6800-EV
SX-@6900-EV
SX-@61K0-EV
2 x 4.9
2 x 4.9
3 x 4.9
3 x 4.9
4 x 4.9
4 x 4.9
6 x 4.9
6 x 4.9
6 x 4.9
6 x 4.9
2 x 5.7
2 x 5.7
3 x 5.7
3 x 5.7
4 x 5.7
4 x 5.7
6 x 5.7
6 x 5.7
6 x 5.7
6 x 5.7
2 x 6.5
2 x 6.5
3 x 6.5
3 x 6.5
4 x 6.5
4 x 6.5
6 x 6.5
6 x 6.5
6 x 6.5
6 x 6.5
The brake chopper option is built-in by the manufacturer and must be specified when the VSD is ordered.
267
I/O Board
Section 13-4
13-4 I/O Board
Order number
01-3876-01
Description
I/O option board 2.0
The I/O option board 2.0 provides three extra relay outputs and three extra
digital inputs. The I/O Board works in combination with the Pump/Fan Control,
but can also be used as a separate option. This option is described in a separate manual.
13-5 Encoder
Order number
01-3876-03
Description
Encoder 2.0 option board
The Encoder 2.0 option board, used for connection of feedback signal of the
actual motor speed via an incremental encoder is described in a separate
manual.
For SX-V type, this function is for speed read-out only or for spin start function. No speed control.
13-6 PTC/PT100
Order number
01-3876-08
Description
PTC/PT100 2.0 option board
The PTC/PT100 2.0 option board for connecting motor thermistors and a max
of 3 PT100 elements to the VSD is described in a separate manual.
13-7 Serial communication and fieldbus
Order number
Description
01-3876-04
01-3876-05
01-3876-06
01-3876-09
RS232/485
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
Modbus/TCP, Industrial Ethernet
01-3876-10
EtherCAT, Industrial Ethernet
For communication with the VSD there are several option boards for communication. There are different options for Fieldbus communication and one
serial communication option with RS232 or RS485 interface which has galvanic isolation.
13-8 Standby supply board option
Order number
01-3954-00
Description
Standby power supply kit for after mounting
The standby supply board option provides the possibility of keeping the communication system up and running without having the 3-phase mains connected. One advantage is that the system can be set up without mains power.
The option will also give backup for communication failure if main power is
lost.
268
Standby supply board option
Section 13-8
The standby supply board option is supplied with external
±10% 24 VDC protected by a 2 A slow acting fuse, from a double isolated
transformer. The terminals X1:1 and X1:2 are voltage polarity independent.
The terminals A- and B+ (on size D) are voltage polarity dependent.
X1
~
Must be
double
isolated
X1:1 Left terminal
X1:2 Right terminal
Fig. 132Connection of standby supply option
Table 37
X1
terminal
1
2
Name
Function
Ext. supply 1 External, VSD main power independent, supply voltage for conExt. supply 2 trol and communication circuits
Specification
24 VDC ±10%
Double isolated
269
Standby supply board option
Section 13-8
Connect the power
supply board to the
two blue terminalas
marked A- and B+
=
0V to A24V to B+
L1
L2
L3
PE
DC-
DC+
R
U
V
Fig. 133Connection of standby supply option for SX-D4030 and SX-D4037
Table 38
Terminal
270
Name
A-
0V
B+
+24V
Function
External, VSD main power independent, supply voltage for control and communication circuits
Specification
24 VDC ±10%
Double isolated
Safe Stop option
Section 13-9
13-9 Safe Stop option
To realize a Safe Stop configuration in accordance with Safe Torque Off (STO)
EN-IEC 6206:20051 SIL 2 & EN-ISO 13849-1, the following three parts need
to be attended to:
1. Inhibit trigger signals with safety relay K1 (via Safe Stop option board).
2. Enable input and control of VSD (via normal I/O control signals of VSD).
3. Power conductor stage (checking status and feedback of driver circuits and
IGBT’s).
To enable the VSD to operate and run the motor, the following signals should
be active:
•
"Inhibit" input, terminals 1 (DC+) and 2 (DC-) on the Safe Stop option
board should be made active by connecting 24 VDC to secure the supply
voltage for the driver circuits of the power conductors via safety relay K1.
See also Fig. 136.
•
High signal on the digital input, e.g. terminal 10 in Fig. 136, which is set to
"Enable". For setting the digital input please refer to section 11-5-2, page
200.
These two signals need to be combined and used to enable the output of the
VSD and make it possible to activate a Safe Stop condition.
Note The "Safe Stop" condition according to EN-IEC 62061:2005 SIL 2 &
EN-ISO 13849-1:2006, can only be realized by de-activating both the "Inhibit"
and "Enable" inputs.
When the "Safe Stop" condition is achieved by using these two different methods, which are independently controlled, this safety circuit ensures that the
motor will not start running because:
•
The 24VDC signal is taken away from the "Inhibit" input, terminals 1 and 2,
the safety relay K1 is switched off.
The supply voltage to the driver circuits of the power conductors is
switched off. This will inhibit the trigger pulses to the power conductors.
•
The trigger pulses from the control board are shut down.
The Enable signal is monitored by the controller circuit which will forward
the information to the PWM part on the Control board.
To make sure that the safety relay K1 has been switched off, this should be
guarded externally to ensure that this relay did not refuse to act. The Safe
Stop option board offers a feedback signal for this via a second forced
switched safety relay K2 which is switched on when a detection circuit has
confirmed that the supply voltage to the driver circuits is shut down. See Table
39 for the contacts connections.
To monitor the "Enable" function, the selection "RUN" on a digital output can
be used. For setting a digital output, e.g. terminal 20 in the example Fig. 136,
please refer to section 11-5-4, page 209 [540].
When the "Inhibit" input is de-activated, the VSD display will show a blinking
"SST" indication in section D (bottom left corner) and the red Trip LED on the
Control panel will blink.
To resume normal operation, the following steps have to be taken:
•
Release "Inhibit" input; 24VDC (High) to terminal 1 and 2.
•
Give a STOP signal to the VSD, according to the set Run/Stop Control in
menu [215].
•
Give a new Run command, according to the set Run/Stop Control in menu
[215].
271
Safe Stop option
Section 13-9
Note The method of generating a STOP command is dependent on the selections
made in Start Signal Level/Edge [21A] and the use of a separate Stop input
via digital input.
!Warning The safe stop function can never be used for electrical maintenance. For
electrical maintenance the VSD should always be disconnected from the
supply voltage.
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fig. 134Connection of safe stop option from SX-D40P7 up to SX-D4037
3 4
1 2
5 6
Fig. 135Connection of safe stop option for SX-D4045 and up.
Table 39 Specification of Safe Stop option board
X1
pin
1
2
3
4
272
Name
Inhibit +
Inhibit NO contact
relay K2
P contact relay
K2
Function
Specification
Inhibit driver circuits of power con- DC 24 V
ductors
(20–30 V)
Feedback; confirmation of activated inhibit
48 VDC/
30 VAC/2 A
Output coils
Section 13-10
Table 39 Specification of Safe Stop option board
5
GND
6
+24 VDC
Safe Stop
Supply ground
Supply Voltage for operating
Inhibit input only.
+24 VDC,
50 mA
Power board
+5V
X1
1
K1
=
2
K2
3
=
4
U
5
6
V
+24 VDC
~
W
X1
Enable
10
Stop
20
Controller
DigIn
PWM
DigOut
Fig. 136
13-10 Output coils
Output coils, which are supplied separately, are recommended for lengths of
screened motor cable longer than 100 m. Because of the fast switching of the
motor voltage and the capacitance of the motor cable both line to line and line
to earth screen, large switching currents can be generated with long lengths
of motor cable. Output coils prevent the VSD from tripping and should be
installed as closely as possible to the VSD.
13-11 Liquid cooling
VSD modules in frame sizes E - K and F69 - K69 are available in a liquid
cooled version. These units are designed for connection to liquid cooling system, normally a heat exchanger of liquid-liquid or liquid-air type. Heat
exchanger is not part of the liquid cooling option.
Drive units with parallel power modules (frame size G - K69) are delivered
with a dividing unit for connection of the cooling liquid. The drive units are
equipped with rubber hoses with leak-proof quick couplings.
The liquid cooling option is described on a separate manual.
273
Liquid cooling
274
Section 13-11
SECTION 14
Technical Data
14-1 Electrical specifications related to model
Table 40 Typical motor power at mains voltage 400 V
Model
Max. output
current [A]*
Normal duty
(120%, 1 min every 10 min)
Heavy duty
(150%, 1 min every 10 min)
Frame size
Power @400V
[kW]
Rated current
[A]
Power @400V
[kW]
Rated current
[A]
SX-D40P7-EV
SX-D41P5-EV
SX-D42P2-EV
SX-D43P0-EV
SX-D44P0-EV
SX-D45P5-EV
SX-D47P5-EV
SX-D4011-EV
SX-D4015-EV
SX-D4018-EV
SX-D4022-EV
SX-D4030-EV
SX-D4037-EV
3.0
4.8
7.2
9.0
11.4
15.6
21.6
31
37
44
55
73
89
0.75
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
2.5
4.0
6.0
7.5
9.5
13.0
18.0
26
31
37
46
61
74
0.55
1.1
1.5
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
2.0
3.2
4.8
6.0
7.6
10.4
14.4
21
25
29.6
37
49
59
SX-D4045-EV
SX-D4055-EV
SX-D4075-EV
SX-D4090-EV
SX-D4110-EV
SX-D4132-EV
SX-@4160-EV
108
131
175
210
252
300
45
55
75
90
110
132
90
109
146
175
210
250
37
45
55
75
90
110
72
87
117
140
168
200
360
450
516
600
720
780
900
1032
1200
1440
1800
160
200
220
250
315
355
400
450
500
630
800
300
375
430
500
600
650
750
860
1000
1200
1500
132
160
200
220
250
315
355
400
450
500
630
240
300
344
400
480
520
600
688
800
960
1200
SX-@4200-EV
SX-@4220-EV
SX-@4250-EV
SX-@4315-EV
SX-@4355-EV
SX-@4400-EV
SX-@4450-EV
SX-@4500-EV
SX-@4630-EV
SX-@4800-EV
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.
275
General electrical specifications
Section 14-2
Table 41 Typical motor power at mains voltage 690 V
Model
SX-D6090-EV
SX-D6110-EV
SX-D6132-EV
SX-D6160EV
SX-@6200-EV
SX-@6250-EV
SX-@6315-EV
SX-@6355-EV
SX-@6450-EV
SX-@6500-EV
SX-@6600-EV
SX-@6630EV
SX-@6710-EV
SX-@6800-EV
SX-@6900-EV
SX-@61K0-EV
Max. output
current [A]*
Normal duty
(120%, 1 min every 10 min)
Heavy duty
(150%, 1 min every 10 min)
Frame size
Power @690V
[kW]
108
131
175
210
252
300
360
450
516
600
720
780
900
1032
1080
1200
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
355
450
500
600
630
710
800
900
1000
Rated current
[A]
90
109
146
175
210
250
300
375
430
500
600
650
750
860
900
1000
Power @690V
[kW]
75
90
110
132
160
200
250
315
315
355
450
500
600
650
710
800
Rated current
[A]
72
87
117
140
168
200
240
300
344
400
480
520
600
688
720
800
F69
H69
I69
J69
K69
* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature.
14-2 General electrical specifications
Table 42 General electrical specifications
General
Mains voltage:
SX-4xxx-EV
SX-6xxx-EV
Mains frequency:
Input power factor:
Output voltage:
Output frequency:
Output switching frequency:
Efficiency at nominal load:
Control signal inputs:
Analogue (differential)
Analogue Voltage/current:
Max. input voltage:
Input impedance:
Resolution:
Hardware accuracy:
Non-linearity
Digital:
276
230-480V +10%/-10%
500-690V +10%/-15%
45 to 65 Hz
0.95
0–Mains supply voltage:
0–400 Hz
3 kHz (adjustable 1.5-6 kHz)
97% up to SX-D47P5
98% rest of models
0-±10 V/0-20 mA via switch
+30 V/30 mA
20 k(voltage)
250 (current)
11 bits + sign
1% type + 1 ½ LSB fsd
1½ LSB
General electrical specifications
Section 14-2
Table 42 General electrical specifications
Input voltage:
Max. input voltage:
Input impedance:
Signal delay:
Control signal outputs
Analogue
Output voltage/current:
Max. output voltage:
Short-circuit current ():
Output impedance:
Resolution:
Maximum load impedance for current
Hardware accuracy:
Offset:
Non-linearity:
Digital
Output voltage:
Shortcircuit current():
Relays
Contacts
References
+10VDC
-10VDC
+24VDC
High: >9 VDC, Low: <4 VDC
+30 VDC
<3.3 VDC: 4.7 k
3.3 VDC: 3.6 k
8 ms
0-10 V/0-20 mA via software setting
+15 V @5 mA cont.
+15 mA (voltage), +140 mA (current)
10 (voltage)
10 bit
500
1.9% type fsd (voltage), 2.4% type fsd (current)
3 LSB
2 LSB
High: >20 VDC @50 mA, >23 VDC open
Low: <1 VDC @50 mA
100 mA max (together with +24 VDC)
0.1 – 2 A/Umax 250 VAC or 42 VDC
+10 VDC @10 mA Short-circuit current +30 mA max
-10 VDC @10 mA
+24 VDC Short-circuit current +100 mA max (together with Digital Outputs)
277
Operation at higher temperatures
Section 14-3
14-3 Operation at higher temperatures
OMRON variable speed drives are made for operation at maximum of 40°C
ambient temperature. However, for most models, it is possible to use the VSD
at higher temperatures with little loss in performance. Table 43 shows ambient
temperatures as well as derating for higher temperatures.
Table 43 Ambient temperature and derating 400–690 V types
IP20
IP54
Model SX-V
Max temp.
SX-D40P7-EV to SX-D4037-EV
SX-D4045-EV to SX-D4132-EV
SX-D6090-EV to SX-D6160-EV
SX-@4160-EV to SX-@4800-EV
SX-@6200-EV to SX-@61K0-EV
Derating: possible
Max temp.
Derating: possible
–
–
–
–
40ºC
40°C
Yes,-2.5%/°C to max +10°C
Yes,-2.5%/°C to max +5°C
40°C
-2.5%/°C to max +5°C
40°C
-2.5%/°C to max +5°C
Example
In this example we have a motor with the following data that we want to run at
the ambient temperature of 45°C:
Voltage
Current
Power
400 V
165 A
90 kW
Select variable speed drive
The ambient temperature is 5 °C higher than the maximum ambient temperature. The following calculation is made to select the correct VSD model.
Derating is possible with loss in performance of 2.5%/°C.
Derating will be: 5 X 2.5% = 12.5%
Calculation for model SX-D4037-EV
74 A - (12.5% X 74) = 64.8 A; this is not enough.
Calculation for model SX-D4110-EV
90 A - (12.5% X 90) = 78.8 A
In this example we select the SX-D4045-EV.
14-4 Operation at higher switching frequency
Table 44 shows the switching frequency for the different VSD models. With the
possibility of running at higher switching frequency you can reduce the noise
level from the motor. The switching frequency is set in menu [22A], Motor
sound, see section section 11-2-3, page 99. At switching frequencies >3 kHz
derating might be needed.
Table 44 Switching frequency
Models
SX-*4xxx-EV
SX-*6xxx-EV
278
Standard
Switching
frequency
3 kHz
3 kHz
Range
1.5–6 kHz
1.5–6 kHz
Dimensions and Weights
Section 14-5
14-5 Dimensions and Weights
The table below gives an overview of the dimensions and weights. The models SX-D4090-EV to SX-D4132-EV in 400 V and SX-D6090-EV to SX-D6250-EV in
690 V are available in IP54 as wall mounted modules. The models SX-*4160EV to SX-*4800-EV in 400 V and SX-*6315-EV to SX-*61K0-EV in 690 V consist
of 2, 3, 4 or 6 paralleled power electonic building block (PEBB) available in
IP20 as wall mounted modules and in IP54 mounted standard cabinet
Protection class IP54 is according to the EN 60529 standard.
Table 45 Mechanical specifications, SX-V 400 V
Models
Frame size
Dim. H x W x D [mm]
IP20 (-A4xxx)
Dim. H x W x D [mm]
IP54 (-D4xxx)
Weight
IP20 [kg]
Weight IP54
[kg]
40P7 to 47P5
4011 to 4022
4030 to 4037
4045 to 4055
4075 to 4090
4110 to 4132
4160 to 4200
4220 to 4250
4315 to 4400
4450 to 4500
B
C
D
E
E
F
G
H
I
J
–
–
–
–
–
–
1036 x 500 x 390
1036 x 500 x 450
1036 x 730 x 450
1036 x 1100 x 450
416 x 203 x 200
512 x 178 x 292
590 x 220 x 295
950 x 285 x 314
950 x 285 x 314
950 x 345 x 314
2250 x 600 x 500
2250 x 600 x 600
2250 x 900 x 600
2250 x 1200 x 600
–
–
–
–
–
–
140
170
248
340
12.5
24
32
56
60
74
350
380
506
697
4630 to 4800
K
1036 x 1560 x 450
2250 x 1800 x 600
496
987
Weight
IP20 [kg]
Weight IP54
[kg]
–
176
257
352
514
77
399
563
773
1100
Table 46 Mechanical specifications, SX-V 690 V
Models
Frame size
6090 to 6160
6200 to 6355
6450 to 6500
6600 to 6630
6710 to 61K0
F69
H69
I69
J69
K69
Dim. H x W x D [mm]
IP20 (-A6xxx)
–
1176 x 500 x 450
1176 x 730 x 450
1176 x 1100 x 450
1176 x 1560 x 450
Dim. H x W x D [mm]
IP54 (-A6xxx)
1090 x 345 x 314
2250 x 600 x 600
2250 x 900 x 600
2250 x 1200 x 600
2250 x 1800 x 600
14-6 Environmental conditions
Table 47 Operation
Parameter
Normal operation
Nominal ambient temperature
Atmospheric pressure
Relative humidity, non-condensing
Contamination,
according to IEC 60721-3-3
0C–40C See table, see Table 43 for different conditions
86–106 kPa
0–90%
No electrically conductive dust allowed. Cooling air must be clean and free from corrosive materials. Chemical gases, class 3C2. Solid particles, class 3S2.
According to IEC 600068-2-6, Sinusodial vibrations:
• 10B
243
Default>Set
A
244
Copy to CP
No Copy
245
Load from CP
No Copy
Autoreset
251
No of Trips
0
252
Overtemp
Off
253
Overvolt D
Off
254
Overvolt G
Off
255
Overvolt
Off
256
Motor Lost
Off
257
Locked Rotor
Off
258
Power Fault
Off
259
Undervoltage
Off
I2t
25A
Motor
25B
Motor I2t TT
Trip
25C
PT100
Off
25D
PT100 TT
Trip
25E
PTC
Off
25F
PTC TT
Trip
25G
Ext Trip
Off
25H
Ext Trip TT
Trip
25I
Com Error
Off
25J
Com Error TT
Trip
25K
Min Alarm
Off
25L
Min Alarm TT
Trip
25M
Max Alarm
Off
25N
Max Alarm TT
Trip
25O
Over curr F
Off
25P
Pump
Off
25Q
Over speed
Off
25R
Ext Mot Temp
Off
25S
Ext Mot TT
Trip
25T
LC Level
Off
25U
LC Level TT
Trip
25V
Brk Fault
Off
Off
Serial Com
261
262
F 140C
Com Type
RS232/485
RS232/485
2621
Baudrate
9600
2622
Address
1
CUSTOM
Section 15 Menu List
DEFAULT
263
264
265
266
300
CUSTOM
Fieldbus
2631
Address
2632
62
PrData Mode
Basic
2633
Read/Write
RW
2634
AddPrValue
0
Comm Fault
2641
ComFlt Mode
Off
2642
ComFlt Time
0.5 s
Ethernet
2651
IP Address
0.0.0.0
2652
MAC Address
000000000000
2653
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0
2654
Gateway
0.0.0.0
2655
DHCP
Off
FB Signal
2661
FB Signal 1
2662
FB Signal 2
2663
FB Signal 3
2664
FB Signal 4
2665
FB Signal 5
2666
FB Signal 6
2667
FB Signal 7
2668
FB Signal 8
2669
FB Signal 9
266A
FB Signal 10
266B
FB Signal 11
266C
FB Signal 12
266D
FB Signal 13
266E
FB Signal 14
266F
FB Signal 15
266G
FB Signal 16
269
FB Status
Process
310
Set/View ref
320
Proc Setting
330
321
Proc Source
Speed
322
Proc Unit
Off
323
User Unit
0
324
Process Min
0
325
Process Max
0
326
Ratio
Linear
327
F(Val) PrMin
Min
328
F(Val) PrMax
Max
Start/Stop
331
Acc Time
10.00s
332
Dec Time
10.00s
287
Section 15 Menu List
DEFAULT
340
350
360
380
288
333
Acc MotPot
16.00s
334
Dec MotPot
16.00s
335
Acc>Min Spd
10.00s
336
Dec
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.6
Linearized : Yes
Author : Candido Ferrio
Copyright : ? Copyright Omron Electronics B.V. 2009
Create Date : 2012:03:08 16:49:32Z
Job Ref : Draft V0.9
Modify Date : 2012:03:14 18:37:53+01:00
Has XFA : No
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.0
Metadata Date : 2012:03:14 18:37:53+01:00
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.0 (Windows)
Format : application/pdf
Title : Omron SX inverter manual
Creator : Candido Ferrio
Document ID : uuid:5e7b60a4-3e50-4725-9b3c-c96e7746069f
Instance ID : uuid:08a186d8-3761-4036-ae07-e0c7566803dd
Page Layout : TwoPageRight
Page Mode : UseOutlines
Page Count : 314
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools